JP2011115648A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can reduce a processing load on a game controlling microcomputer and enables a player to recognize whether a current game state is advantageous or not. <P>SOLUTION: A game state is controlled to be a probability variation state and a high base state that is a state easily getting a starting prize. When a jackpot is determined, whether a probability variation flag or a high base flag is set or not is confirmed, and, according to whether the current game state is the probability variation state or not, the high pace state or not, a corresponding state determining table is set. Based on the set state determining table and the state determining random number, whether the game is to be the probability variation state or not or whether to be the high pace state or not is determined. On the other hand, a sound/lamp controlling microcomputer 100b determines a performance content based on the received variation pattern command and transmits a command including the determined performance content to a symbol controlling microcomputer 100a. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2011,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention includes variable display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of the identification information. After a predetermined variable display execution condition is satisfied, the variable display start condition is satisfied. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that starts variable display of identification information and shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the display result of variable display of identification information becomes a specific display result.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Furthermore, there is provided a variable display unit capable of changing the display state, and configured to give a predetermined game value to the player when the display result of the variable display unit is in a predetermined specific display mode. is there.

  The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In the gaming machine, when the variable display of the identification information is executed, a game effect such as a notice effect is performed using the variable display means. In this case, for example, a game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that performs game control determines an effect content (notice effect) to be displayed on the variable display means, and a command (for example, a change) that includes the determined effect content. Pattern command) is transmitted to effect control means (for example, an effect control microcomputer) for effect control. Then, the effect control means performs a game effect such as a notice effect using the variable display means in accordance with the effect content indicated by the received command.

  In addition, the gaming machine shifts the gaming state to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, a display result of a variable display unit that displays a special symbol becomes a combination of a predetermined specific display mode (a big hit symbol), which is usually referred to as “big hit”. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. In addition, when a special condition is satisfied such that the display result of the variable display unit is a special jackpot symbol out of the jackpot symbols, the probability that a jackpot will be generated is increased to a high probability state (also referred to as a probable variation state). May be configured to migrate.

  In addition, there is a gaming machine configured to control the probability of a big hit using three stages of probability states, a low probability state, a medium probability state, and a high probability state (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In addition, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the number of times that the medium probability state continues (the number of times (for example, two times) indicating how many times the state continues until the big hit is reached) continues in the high probability state. Control is performed so as to be greater than the number of times (for example, once). With such a configuration, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the occurrence of a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit) in a short period of time is reduced.

  In addition, after the big hit state is finished, the state shifts to the high probability state, and when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times in the high probability state, the state is shifted to the low probability state and the opening time of the variable winning device provided in the game area is lengthened. (See, for example, Patent Document 2). In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 2, the gaming state is shifted to the high probability state without reducing the variation time of the identification information (special symbol) after the end of the big hit state. Then, when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times in the high probability state, the high probability state is terminated, and control is performed to increase the opening time of the variable winning device by shifting to the short time state that shortens the variation time of the identification information. To do.

JP 2002-253797 A (paragraphs 0072-0079, FIGS. 10-11) Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-118469 (paragraphs 0049-0052)

  In the gaming machine, when the game control means determines the content of the effect such as the notice effect, the game control means is responsive to the processing content to be executed by the control means (effect control means) other than the game control means. The production content will be decided. Therefore, the processing load of the game control microcomputer which is the game control means is large.

  In addition, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the gaming state can be controlled in three stages of probability states, a low probability state, a medium probability state, and a high probability state. However, since the difference in each probability state is only a difference in the probability that a jackpot will occur, the player will determine whether the current gaming state is an advantageous state during the game until the jackpot occurs. It cannot be recognized. Therefore, it is impossible for the player to recognize whether or not the current gaming state is an advantageous state, and the player's interest in the game may be reduced.

  In addition, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 2, regardless of the current gaming state, the game machine shifts to the high probability state as it is after the big hit state. When the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times in the high probability state, the state shifts to a state (time-short state) in which the opening time of the variable winning device is lengthened as it is. Therefore, the player can easily specify the timing to shift to the probability changing state and the timing to shift to the state in which the opening time of the variable winning device is lengthened. Therefore, the player cannot be interested in which game state is to be changed during the game, and the player's interest in the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, the present invention reduces the processing burden of the game control microcomputer in a gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the display result of variable display of identification information becomes a specific display result. The player can recognize whether or not the current gaming state is an advantageous state, and can make the player interested in which gaming state to shift to during the game. The purpose is to.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes variable display means (for example, a variable display device 9) that can variably display a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols) that can identify each of them. After the execution condition (for example, winning of a game ball at the start winning opening 14) is established, the variable display of the identification information is performed based on the establishment of the variable display start condition (for example, final stop of special symbol and end of jackpot game). A game machine that shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the display result of variable display of identification information becomes a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol), and controls the progress of the game A game control board (for example, the main board 31) on which a game control microcomputer (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) for executing the game control process is mounted; An electric component control microcomputer (for example, sound / lamp control) that controls at least one of a sound output device (for example, the speaker 27) or a light emitter (for example, each of the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c) that is an electric component used for production. The electronic component control board (for example, the sound / lamp control board 80b) on which the microcomputer 100b is mounted and variable display of the identification information in the variable display means are controlled, and a predetermined effect display is displayed on the variable display means as a game effect. A display control board (for example, the symbol control board 80a) on which a display control microcomputer (for example, the symbol control microcomputer 100a) for executing the control to be performed is mounted. When is established, the display result of the identification information of the variable display means is determined. Display result determining means (for example, a part for executing step S3314 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560) and a variation pattern command (for example, shown in FIG. 53) that can specify a variable display variation pattern of identification information in the variable display means. Game control-side command transmission means for transmitting commands 8000 (H) to 8008 (H)) to the electrical component control microcomputer (for example, the address corresponding to the command in step S392 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560). Based on the setting, when the display result determining means determines that the display result of the identification information is the specific display result, the game state is set as the specific game state. Is advantageous for different players It is determined whether or not a specific transition condition (for example, a transition condition to the probability variation state, a high release condition) that is a condition for transition to the specific advantageous state (for example, the probability variation state, the high base state) is satisfied. Based on the specific transition condition determination means (for example, the part that executes step S3324 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560) and the specific transition condition determination means determine that the specific transition condition is satisfied, the specific game state is determined. A game state transition control means (for example, a part for executing steps S3503, S3509, and S3511 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the transition of the game state to a specific advantageous state after the completion. The fluctuations received from the game control microcomputer Based on the turn command, an effect content determining means for determining the content of the game effect (for example, a part for executing steps S1853 to S1855 in the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b) and the game effect determined by the effect content determining means. Electrical component control side command transmission means (for example, a part for executing step S1856 in the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b) for transmitting a command capable of specifying the content (for example, an effect content designation command) to the display control microcomputer. The display control microcomputer controls the game effect by performing a predetermined effect display on the variable display means based on the content of the game effect indicated by the command received from the electric component control microcomputer (for example, the design) Microcontroller for control In the computer 100a, the game state transition control means is a specific transition condition determination means based on the effect content designation command transmitted in step S1856, in which the presentation is performed using the variable display device 9 according to the same processing as in step S775). As a specific transition condition, among the specific advantageous states, a high-probability state (in which the probability that the display result of variable display of identification information is a specific display result is improved compared to before the specific transition condition is satisfied ( For example, the high probability of controlling the transition of the gaming state to the high probability state as the specific advantageous state based on the determination that the high probability transition condition (for example, the transition condition to the probability variation state) for transition to the probability variation state is satisfied. State transition control means (for example, steps S3503 and S351 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560) 1) and the specific transition condition determination means, as the specific transition condition, among the specific advantageous conditions, the high display condition is established in which the execution condition of the variable display is more easily established than before the specific transition condition is satisfied. A high establishment state in which the gaming state is controlled to be shifted to the high establishment state as the specific advantageous state based on the determination that the high establishment condition (for example, the high release condition) to be transferred to the state (for example, the high base state) is established. A game state that includes a transition control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S3503 and S3509 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560) and that determines which game state the transition control is performed by the game state transition control means Determination means (for example, steps S3316 and S331 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560) , S3320), and the specific transition condition determination means determines that the gaming state determination means determines that the gaming state is controlled to shift to both the high probability state and the high establishment state (for example, When the CPU 56 of the gaming control microcomputer 560 determines Y in step S3316 and determines Y in step S3317), and when it is determined that the gaming state is controlled to be shifted only to the high probability state (for example, When the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 determines Y in step S3316 and N in step S3317), it shifts to both the high probability state and the high establishment state at different ratios. Using another data that sets whether to shift only to the established state, the high probability transition condition and the high Or the high probability transition condition is satisfied (for example, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 sets the probability change / high base state determination table set in step S3318 or the probability change / low set in step S3319). The base state determination table is used to execute the state determination process in step S3324).

  In the present invention, the electric component control means uniquely determines the effect contents based on the variation pattern command, and the variable display control means is configured to execute the game effect according to the effect contents determined by the electric component control means. Therefore, the game control microcomputer does not have to determine the contents of the presentation. Therefore, the processing burden of the game control microcomputer can be reduced. In addition to performing control to shift the gaming state to the high probability state based on the establishment of the high probability transition condition, control to transition the gaming state to the high probability state based on the establishment of the high probability condition Since it is configured, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the current gaming state is an advantageous state. Also, there are multiple types of gaming states, such as when transitioning to a high probability state only, or when transitioning to a high probability state and transitioning to a high probability state, and it depends on which state the current gaming state is It is configured to determine the state to shift the gaming state at the selection ratio, so it can keep the player interested in which gaming state to transition to during the game, and maintain the player's interest in the game can do.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a front view which shows the front surface of the game board in the state which removed the glass door frame. It is the rear view which looked at the gaming machine from the back. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate and an effect control board. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the main board and a signal line of an effect control command transmitted from the main board to the effect control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a random number circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an update rule selection register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an update rule memory. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example in case a count value permutation change circuit changes the permutation of the count value which a counter outputs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a count value permutation change register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a random number maximum value setting register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a period setting register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a count value update register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a random value taking-in register. It is explanatory drawing of an example of the random number update system selection register and the random number update system selection data written in the random number update system selection register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a random number circuit starting register. It is a circuit diagram which shows one structural example of a random value memory circuit. It is a timing chart which shows the timing when each signal is input into a random value storage circuit, and the timing when a random value storage circuit outputs each signal. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the transmission part of a serial communication circuit. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the receiving part of a serial communication circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the data format of the data which serial communication transmits / receives with the microcomputer mounted in each control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a baud rate register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the control register A and communication format setting data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the control register B and interrupt request setting data. It is a figure which shows the example of status register A and status confirmation data. It is a figure which shows the example of status register B and status confirmation data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the control register C and error interrupt request setting data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the data register with which a serial communication circuit is provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the address map of the storage area in the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the address map in a user program management area. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of initial value change system setting data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a user program. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a random number circuit setting program. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement which updates the value of random R, or reads the value of random R, when the 1st random number update system is selected. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation | movement which updates the value of random R, or reads the value of random R, when the 2nd random number update system is selected. It is explanatory drawing which shows each memory with which the microcomputer for game control is provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the table memory for jackpot determination. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an interruption process priority table. It is a flowchart which shows a random circuit setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a random number maximum value reset process. It is a flowchart which shows an initial value change process. It is a timing chart which shows the timing when each signal is input into a random number circuit, and the timing when each signal is generated in a random number circuit. It is a flowchart which shows a serial communication circuit setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a flowchart which shows a random circuit initial value update process. It is a flowchart which shows a count value permutation change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a state determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a state determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a state determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a state determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a change time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a mode that a gaming state changes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of a mode that a gaming state changes. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output with respect to the payout control means from a game control means. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control command transmitted / received between a game control means and a payout control means. It is a block diagram which shows the signal line etc. which are used for transmission / reception of a control signal and a control command. It is a timing chart showing an example of how to output a payout control signal and a payout control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize ball process. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an interrupt process performed by the serial communication circuit in response to an interrupt request. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a prize ball number table. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball control process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball transmission waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball number command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball transmission completion waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball ACK waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball re-transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball abnormality detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a main control communication process. It is an explanatory view showing the configuration of a production control command. It is an explanatory view showing how to send the production control command. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number used by production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration design normal process in an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration design change start process in an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration pattern change process in effect control process processing. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of the relay board | substrate in 2nd Embodiment, a sound / lamp control board, and a symbol control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for sound / lamp control in 2nd Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number used by the sound / lamp control process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows production content determination processing. It is a block diagram which shows the other circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, a sound / lamp control board, and a symbol control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the interruption process priority table in 4th Embodiment.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front, and FIG. 2 is a front view showing the front of the game board. In the following embodiments, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can be applied to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (excluding a game board described later). Is a structure including

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for launching the game balls are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. A game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6.

  Near the center of the game area 7, there is provided a variable display device (decorative symbol display device) 9 including a plurality of variable display portions each variably displaying an effect decorative symbol. The variable display device 9 has, for example, three variable display portions (symbol display areas) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The variable display device 9 performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (production) during the variable symbol display period of the special symbol by the special symbol indicator 8. The variable display device 9 that performs variable display of decorative symbols is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board.

  At the bottom of the variable display device 9, four special symbol hold memory indicators 18 for displaying the number of valid winning balls that have entered the start winning opening 14, that is, the number of hold memories (also referred to as start memory or start prize memory), are provided. ing. The special symbol reservation storage display 18 displays up to four reservation storage numbers in the order of winning. The special symbol hold storage display 18 increases the number of LEDs in the lit state by 1 each time there is a start winning in the start winning opening 14. Then, each time the special symbol display 8 starts variable display, the special symbol hold storage indicator 18 reduces the number of LEDs in the lit state by 1 (that is, turns off one LED). Specifically, the special symbol hold storage display 18 shifts the lighting state each time variable display is started on the special symbol display 8. In this example, the upper limit number (up to 4) is provided for the number of starting memories by winning to the start winning opening 14, but the upper limit number may be four or more.

  A special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8 that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided on the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, the special symbol display 8 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, for example. The special symbol display 8 may be configured to variably display a larger number of numbers such as 0 to 99 in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp a specific stop symbol. In addition, the variable display device 9 performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (for production) during the variable symbol display period of the special symbol by the special symbol indicator 8.

  Further, on the left side of the variable display device 9, a hammer 151 is provided as a movable member used for game effects. The hammer 151 can fall to the right with the movable portion 152 as a fulcrum, and can produce an effect of hitting the leftmost decorative symbol among the decorative symbols displayed on the variable display device 9.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an operation switch 81 that can be operated by the player while the game is in progress. For example, when the operation switch 81 is operated (pressed), the hammer 151 as a movable member operates.

  Below the variable display device 9 is provided a variable winning ball device 15 that forms a start winning opening 14. The winning ball that has entered the start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16.

  Below the variable winning ball apparatus 15, a special variable winning ball apparatus 20 using an opening / closing plate that is controlled to be opened by a solenoid 21 in a specific gaming state (big hit state) is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is a means for opening and closing the big winning opening. Of the winning balls that are won in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 and guided to the back of the game board 6, the winning ball that has entered one (V winning area: special area) is detected by the V winning switch 22 and then counted by the count switch 23. The game ball that has been detected and entered the other region is detected by the count switch 23 as it is. On the back of the game board 6, a solenoid 21A for switching the route in the special winning opening is also provided.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting left and right lamps (designs can be visually recognized when lit). For example, if the left lamp is lit at the end of variable display, it is a hit. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol start memory display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time a game ball passes to the gate 32, the normal symbol start memory display 41 increments the LED to be lit by one. Each time the variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  The game board 6 is provided with a plurality of winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39, and winning of game balls to the winning holes 29, 30, 33, 39 is performed by winning hole switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, respectively. Detected. Each winning opening 29, 30, 33, 39 constitutes a winning area provided in the game board 6 as an area for accepting game media and allowing winning. The start winning opening 14 and the big winning opening also constitute a winning area that accepts game media and allows winning. Around the left and right of the game area 7, there are provided decorative lamps 25 blinking and displayed during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for absorbing a game ball that has not won a prize. Two speakers 27 that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. A top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c are provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure (such as a big prize opening) in the game area 7. The top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decorative LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine.

  In this example, a prize ball lamp 51 that is lit during award ball payout is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball break lamp 52 that is lit when the supply ball is cut in the vicinity of the top frame lamp 28a. Is provided. Further, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter referred to as “card unit”) 50 that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The card unit 50 includes, for example, a usable display lamp that indicates whether or not the card unit 50 is in a usable state, a connection table direction indicator that indicates which side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 corresponds to the card unit, and a card unit. When checking the card insertion indicator lamp indicating that a card is inserted in the card, the card insertion slot into which the card as a recording medium is inserted, and the card reader / writer mechanism provided on the back of the card insertion slot A card unit lock for releasing the card unit is provided.

  A game ball launched from the ball striking device by the player's operation enters the game area 7 through the hit ball rail, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the start winning opening 14 and is detected by the start opening switch 14a, the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 starts variable display (variation) if the variable display of the symbol can be started. If the variable display of the symbol cannot be started, the number of reserved memories is increased by one.

  The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 8 stops when a certain time has elapsed. If the special symbol (stop symbol) at the time of stoppage is a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state. That is, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is released until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls wins. When the game ball is won in the V winning area while the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened and detected by the V winning switch 22, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). Further, without providing the V winning area, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 may be allowed to be released up to the last round of the determined number of rounds (for example, up to 15 rounds).

  When the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 at the time of stoppage is a jackpot symbol (probability variation symbol) with a probability variation, the probability of the next jackpot increases. That is, it becomes a more advantageous state for the player in the probability variation state.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32, the normal symbol display unit 10 enters a state in which the normal symbol is variably displayed. Further, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined time.

  In this embodiment, when a predetermined high release condition is satisfied, the game ball is likely to start and win (that is, the execution condition of variable display in the special symbol display device 8 and the variable display device 9 is easily satisfied). Transition to the high base state, which is a controlled gaming state. In this embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the high base state based on a state determination random number and a state determination table, which will be described later, a predetermined high release condition is established, and the state is shifted to the high base state. For example, when it is determined that the high base determination random number for determining whether or not to shift to the high base state matches the predetermined determination value, the predetermined high release condition is satisfied, and the high base state You may make it transfer to. Further, for example, when it is determined that the stop symbol of the special symbol is a predetermined high base symbol, a predetermined high release condition may be satisfied and the high base state may be entered. In the high base state, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened or the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased compared to the case where the high base state is not set. It becomes easier to win a start.

  The “base” is a term that means a ratio between the number X of game balls to be launched into the game area and the number Y of game balls to be paid out after winning in each of the winning openings 14, 29, 30, 33, 39. is there. Specifically, the base is calculated by, for example, an equation of [(number of game balls Y per unit time / number of game balls X per unit time) · 100]. Therefore, when the base is controlled to a special game state with a value exceeding 100, the player's ball will increase as the game progresses, and the base game has a value less than 100. When the state is controlled, the player's ball will decrease as the game progresses.

  Specifically, when base = 100, the number X of game balls launched into the game area per unit time and the number Y of game balls to be paid out after winning in each of the winning openings 14, 29, 30, 33, 39 Means that various settings are made so that the same number is obtained. When base = 50, when X game balls are launched into the game area per unit time, This means that various settings are made so that (X / 2) game balls are paid out by winning 29, 30, 33, 39. When base = 200, X per unit time It means that various settings are made so that when game balls are launched into the game area, 2X game balls are paid out by winning at each of the winning openings 14, 29, 30, 33, 39. To do.

  When a predetermined high opening condition is satisfied, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol rather than extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state). It is possible to shift to the high base state by shifting to the normal symbol probability changing state in which is increased. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state in which a start winning is easily made (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  In addition, when a predetermined high open condition is established, even if the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to the normal symbol short time state in which the normal symbol change time (variable display period) is shortened, the normal symbol display unit 10 can shift to the high base state. Good. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, when a predetermined high opening condition is established, a transition to a high base state may be made by shifting to a special symbol short-time state in which the variation time (variable display period) of a special symbol or a decorative symbol is shortened. In the special symbol short-time state, the variation time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is increased (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory is accelerated). As a result, it becomes easier to win a start (transition to a high base state), and the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, when a predetermined high open condition is established, it is easy to win a start by shifting to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short state and special symbol short state). (Move to the high base state). In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state).

  Next, the structure of the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the gaming machine as seen from the back side.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the gaming machine, a variable display control unit 49 including an effect control board 80 on which an effect control microcomputer for controlling the variable display device 9 is mounted, a game control microcomputer and the like are mounted. A game control board (main board) 31 is installed. In addition, a payout control board 37 on which a payout control microcomputer for performing ball payout control is mounted is installed. The production control microcomputer controls the variable display device 9 provided on the game board 6, and various decoration LEDs, a decoration lamp 25, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b provided on the frame side, and The lighting of the right frame lamp 28c is controlled, and the sound generation from the speaker 27 is controlled.

  Further, a power supply substrate 910 and a touch sensor substrate 91 on which a power supply circuit for generating DC30V, DC21V, DC12V, and DC5V is mounted are provided. Although most of the power supply substrate 910 overlaps with the main substrate 31, there is an exposed portion that is exposed so as to be visible from the outside without overlapping the main substrate 31. In the exposed portion, the main board 31 and each control board (the effect control board 80 and the payout control board 37) in the gaming machine 1 and each electrical component (a part that operates when power is supplied) provided in the gaming machine ) Is provided as a power supply permission means for executing or cutting off the power supply to. Furthermore, a replaceable fuse is provided inside the power switch in the exposed portion (inside the substrate).

  Each control board is equipped with control means including a control microcomputer. The control means is an electrical component (game device: ball payout device 97, variable display device 9, light emission from a lamp, LED, etc.) provided in the gaming machine in accordance with a command signal (control signal) as a command from the game control means or the like. Body, speaker 27, etc.). Hereinafter, the main board 31 may be included in the control board for explanation. In that case, the control means mounted on the control board refers to each of the game control means and the means for controlling the electrical components provided in the gaming machine in accordance with a command signal from the game control means or the like. A substrate on which a microcomputer other than the main substrate 31 is mounted may be referred to as a sub-substrate.

  On the back side of the gaming machine, a terminal board 160 provided with terminals for outputting various information to the outside of the gaming machine is installed above. The terminal board 160 includes at least a ball break terminal for introducing the output of the ball break detection switch 167 and outputting it externally, a prize ball terminal for outputting prize ball information (prize ball number signal) and a ball. A ball lending terminal for externally outputting lending information (ball lending number signal) is provided. Further, an information terminal board (information output board) 36 having terminals for outputting various information from the main board 31 to the outside of the gaming machine is installed near the center.

  The game balls stored in the storage tank 38 pass through the guide rail 39 and reach the ball payout device covered with the payout case 40A via the curve rod. A ball break switch 187 as a game medium break detection means is provided on the upper part of the ball payout device. When the ball break switch 187 detects a ball break, the dispensing operation of the ball dispensing device stops. The ball break switch 187 is a switch for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the game ball passage, but the ball break detection switch 167 for detecting the shortage of supply balls in the storage tank 38 is also an upstream portion (storage tank 38). In the vicinity of the head). When the ball break detection switch 167 detects the shortage of game balls, the game machine is replenished to the game machine from the supply mechanism provided on the gaming machine installation island.

  When a large number of game balls as prizes based on winning a prize and game balls based on a ball lending request are paid out and the hitting ball supply tray 3 is full, the game balls are guided to the surplus ball receiving tray 4 through the surplus ball passage. When the game ball is further paid out, a sensing lever (not shown) presses a full tank switch (not shown) as a storage state detection means, and the full tank switch as a storage state detection means is turned on. In this state, the rotation of the payout motor in the ball payout device is stopped, the operation of the ball payout device is stopped, and the driving of the ball hitting device is also stopped.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration in the main board 31. 4 also shows a payout control board 37, an interface board 66, a relay board 77, and an effect control board 80 mounted on the gaming machine. The main board 31 includes a basic circuit (corresponding to game control means) 53 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program, a gate switch 32a, a start port switch 14a, a V winning switch 22, a count switch 23, a winning port switch 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a and an input driver circuit 58 for supplying a signal from the total winning counting switch 34 to the basic circuit 53, a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15, a solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20, and An output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21A for switching the route in the special winning opening according to a command from the basic circuit 53 is mounted.

  It should be noted that switches such as the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the V winning switch 22, the count switch 23, the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, the all winning count switch 34, and the like may be referred to as sensors. . That is, the name of the game medium detection means is not limited as long as it is a game medium detection means (game ball detection means in this example) that can detect a game ball. Each of the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a that perform winning detection is also a winning detection means that detects the winning of a game ball in the winning area. Note that even if a passing gate such as the gate 32 is used, if a prize ball is paid out, a game ball entering the passing gate becomes a winning and a switch provided on the passing gate (for example, The gate switch 32a) becomes a winning detection means. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game ball that has won the V winning area is detected by the V winning switch 22 and also by the count switch 23. Therefore, the number of game balls won in the special winning opening corresponds to the number detected by the count switch 23. However, the game balls won in the V prize area are detected only by the V prize switch 22, and the number of game balls won in the big prize opening is determined by the number detected by the V prize switch 22 and the number detected by the count switch 23. You may make it become the sum. Further, the V winning area may not be provided, and a continuation right may always be generated in rounds other than the final round.

  The basic circuit 53 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as storage means (variation data storage means for storing fluctuation data) used as a work memory, and a control operation according to the program. A game control microcomputer 560 having a CPU 56 is included. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 refers to a central processing unit (a portion excluding storage means such as the ROM 54 and RAM 55, the I / O port unit 57, etc.) of the basic circuit 53 that operates according to a program. Main processing and interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing and interrupt processing by an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505) are executed. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a portion of the basic circuit 53 including a storage means such as a ROM 54 and a RAM 55, a random number circuit 503, a serial communication circuit 505, an I / O port unit 57, etc. in addition to the CPU 56. It transmits and receives various data to and from the microcomputer mounted on each board (the payout control board 37 and the effect control board 80).

  In this embodiment, expressions such as “the microcomputer transmits and receives” are used. Specifically, for example, when data transmission is performed, the CPU sets data in the transmission data register of the serial communication circuit, and The serial communication circuit transmits the data set in the transmission data register. In addition, the CPU transmits data via the I / O port unit. For example, when data reception is performed, the reception data is written into the reception data register of the serial communication circuit, and the CPU reads the reception data from the reception data register. In addition, the CPU receives data via the I / O port unit.

  In the present embodiment, a case where the game control microcomputer 560 performs serial communication with the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 will be described.

  In this embodiment, the ROM 54, the RAM 55 serving as storage means as a work memory, and the I / O port unit 57 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to include at least the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, hereinafter, the game control microcomputer 560 executes (or performs processing) specifically. Is that the CPU 56 executes control according to the program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31. The game control means is realized by a basic circuit 53 including a game control microcomputer 560.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  A reset signal from the power supply board 910 is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. The reset signal from the power supply board 910 is also input to the reset terminal of the payout control microcomputer. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer become operable, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer stop operating. It becomes a state. Accordingly, during the period in which the reset signal is at a high level, an allowable signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer is output, and in the period in which the reset signal is at a low level, An operation stop signal for stopping the operations of the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer is output. A reset circuit may be mounted on each control board (including the main board 31), or a reset circuit is mounted on one or more of the plurality of control boards, and a reset signal is sent from there to another control circuit. You may make it supply to a board | substrate.

  Furthermore, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board 910 has decreased to a predetermined value or less is input to the input port of the basic circuit 53 via the payout control board 37. A clear signal indicating that the clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the basic circuit 53.

  The clear signal is branched in the main board 31 and is also supplied to the payout control board 37. Note that the state of the clear signal input by the game control microcomputer 560 via the input port may be output to the payout control board 37 via the output port.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The display control of the variable display device 9 that receives and displays the decorative design variably, the sound output control of the speaker (sound output device) 27, the display control of the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, 28c, and the like are performed. In this embodiment, “effect control” means display control of the variable display device 9, sound output control of the speaker 27, and display control of the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c. It means performing such as. In this embodiment, the effect control means is provided by the effect control microcomputer 100 that performs display control of the variable display device 9, sound output control of the speaker 27, and display control of the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c. Realized.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77 and the effect control board 80. In this embodiment, the display control of the variable display device 9, the sound output control of the sound output device 27, and the lamps 25, 28 a, 28 b, and 28 c are performed using one control board (production control board 80). Although a case where display control is performed will be described, a plurality of control boards may be used. For example, in addition to the effect control board 80 for effect control, a lamp driver board for controlling each lamp and a sound output board for controlling the sound output device may be provided. In this case, the effect control means is realized by a control microcomputer and a control circuit mounted on the lamp driver board and the sound output board in addition to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 100 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a strobe signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77. In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the variable display device 9 using the LCD based on the effect control command.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit is installed. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 5 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver 352. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the button lamp 130. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs sound number data to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesizing IC 173 generates a voice or a sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 175. The amplifier circuit 175 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 173 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 176 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 174 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are communicated between the production control microcomputer 100, the lamp driver 352, and the speech synthesis IC 173 (such as transmitting a response signal from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side). Communication).

  The effect control microcomputer 100 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM stores character image data frequently used among images displayed on the variable display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol, or the like (including decorative designs) in advance. Is. The effect control microcomputer 100 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control of the variable display device 9 based on data input from the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the variable display device 9 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the variable display device 9.

  FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the main board 31 and signal lines of an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 produces an effect control command using eight signal lines CD0 to CD7 for transmitting the effect control signal. Transmit to the control board 80. In addition, a signal line of an effect control INT signal for transmitting and receiving a strobe signal is also wired between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80.

  As shown in FIG. 6, wiring from the start port switch 14a is connected to the main board 31. The main board 31 is also provided with wiring from the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 which is a big winning opening, and various switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a for detecting the winning of a game ball to other winning openings. It is connected. Further, the main board 31 is connected to a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball apparatus 15, a solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, and a wiring to the solenoid 21A for switching the path in the special winning opening. .

  The main board 31 includes a game control microcomputer 560, an input driver circuit 58, and an output circuit 59. The game control microcomputer 560 operates in accordance with a clock circuit 501, a reset controller 502 that functions as a system reset means, a random number circuit 503a, 503b, a ROM 54 that stores a game control program, a RAM 55 that is used as a work memory, and a program. CPU 56, CTC 504 for sending an interrupt request signal (interrupt request signal by timer interrupt) to CPU 56, serial communication circuit 505 for performing asynchronous serial communication with microcomputers provided in payout control board 37 and effect control board 80, and I / O An O port unit 57 is incorporated.

  In this embodiment, the microcomputer on a board (for example, the payout control board 37 or the effect control board 80) different from the board (for example, the main board 31) on which the microcomputer incorporating the serial communication circuit 505 is mounted. Although the case where the serial communication circuit 505 is used for communication will be described, the serial communication circuit 505 may perform serial communication with another microcomputer included in the board on which the microcomputer incorporating the serial communication circuit 505 is mounted. For example, when two microcomputers having the same configuration are mounted on the same substrate, serial communication circuits built in the microcomputers may perform serial communication with each other.

The clock circuit 501 outputs a reference clock signal CLK having a predetermined period generated by dividing the system clock signal by 2 ⁷ (= 128) to the random number circuits 503a and 503b. When a low level signal is input for a predetermined period, the reset controller 502 outputs a predetermined initialization signal to the CPU 56 and the random number circuits 503a and 503b to reset the game control microcomputer 560.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, the game control microcomputer 560 is equipped with two random number circuits 503a and 503b having different ranges of random value values that can be generated. The random number circuit 503a is a random number circuit (hereinafter also referred to as a 12-bit random number circuit) that generates a 12-bit pseudo-random number. The 12-bit random number circuit 503a has a function of generating a random number having a value within a range that can be generated by 12 bits (that is, a range from 0 to 4095). The random number circuit 503b is a random number circuit (hereinafter also referred to as a 16-bit random number circuit) that generates a 16-bit pseudo-random number. The 16-bit random number circuit 503b has a function of generating a random number having a value in a range that can be generated in 16 bits (that is, a range from 0 to 65535). In this embodiment, the case where the game control microcomputer 560 includes two random number circuits is described. However, the game control microcomputer 560 may include three or more random number circuits. In this embodiment, when the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are comprehensively expressed, or when indicating either the 12-bit random number circuit 503a or the 16-bit random number circuit 503b, This is called a random number circuit 503.

  Next, the configuration of the random number circuit 503 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the random number circuit 503. In this embodiment, the basic configurations of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are the same. As shown in FIG. 7, the random number circuit 503 includes a counter 521, a comparator 522, a count value permutation changing circuit 523, a clock signal output circuit 524, a count value update signal output circuit 525, a random value read signal output circuit 526, a random number update. A system selection signal output circuit 527, a selector 528, a random number circuit activation signal output circuit 530, a random value storage circuit 531, an inversion circuit 532, a latch signal generation circuit 533, and a timer circuit 534 are included.

  In this embodiment, the random number circuit 503 determines whether or not the display result of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information is a specific display result (for example, the combination of display symbols of the special symbol display device 8 is a combination of jackpot symbols) A random number for jackpot determination is generated. When the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the specific display result is based on the random number generated by the random number circuit 503, the game state is changed to a specific game state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state). Transition.

  The counter 521 receives a predetermined signal selected by the selector 528 and outputs a count value C in response to the signal input from the selector 528. In this case, the counter 521 inputs a predetermined initial value, and cyclically updates the count value C from the initial value to a predetermined final value according to a certain rule, and outputs it. Further, when the count value C is updated to the final value, the counter 521 outputs a notification signal indicating that the count value C has been updated to the final value to the CPU 56. In this embodiment, when a notification signal is output from the counter 521, the CPU 56 updates the initial value.

  In this embodiment, every time a signal is input from the selector 528 (every time a rising edge in the signal from the selector 528 is input), the counter 521 increments the count value C from “0” to “4095” by one. Count up. Further, when the counter 521 counts up the count value C to “4095”, the counter 521 outputs a notification signal indicating that the count value C has been updated to the final value to the CPU 56. Then, the CPU 56 inputs a notification signal from the counter 521 and updates the initial value. Then, the counter 521 counts up the count value C again from the initial value updated by the CPU 56 to “4095”. Further, when counting up to “4095”, the counter 521 starts counting from “0” again. Then, the counter 521 outputs a notification signal to the CPU 56 when it counts up to a value (final value) immediately before the updated initial value. In this embodiment, the comparator 522 outputs a notification signal to the counter 521 when all the count values are input, as will be described later. In this case, when the notification signal is input from the comparator 522, the counter 521 resets the count value to “0”.

  The comparator 522 determines whether the input count value is larger than the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535, and the count value is larger than the random number maximum value (exceeded the random number maximum value). ), A notification signal may be output to the counter 521. In this case, for example, when the comparator 522 determines that the count value exceeds the random number maximum value, the notification signal is output to the counter 521 before the clock signal output circuit 524 next outputs the random number generation clock signal SI1. . For example, consider a case where the random number maximum value “256” is set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. In this case, when the counter 521 counts up from “0” to “256” and further outputs the count value “257”, the comparator 522 determines that the input count value “257” exceeds the random number maximum value “256”. Determine and output a notification signal to the counter 521. When the notification signal is input from the comparator 522, the counter 521 updates the count value to “258” and outputs it without waiting for the input of the random number generation clock signal SI1 from the clock signal output circuit 524. By repeatedly executing the above processing, the comparator 522 determines that the count value exceeds the random number maximum value while inputting from the count value “257” to “4095”. Output a notification signal. The counter 521 repeatedly updates and outputs the count value without waiting for the input of the random number generation clock signal SI1 from the clock signal output circuit 524 while the notification signal is input from the comparator 522. By doing so, until the clock signal output circuit 524 next outputs the random number generation clock signal SI1, the count value is controlled to be counted up from “257” to “4095” at a high speed, Control is performed so that random numbers from “257” to “4095” are skipped (not stored in the random value storage circuit 531).

  The count value permutation change circuit 523 includes a count value permutation change register (RSC) 536, an update rule selection register (RRC) 542, and an update rule memory 543. The count value permutation change register 536 stores count value permutation change data “01h” for changing the permutation (order of arrangement from the initial value to the final value), which is the update order of the count value C counted up by the counter 521. . When the numerical value permutation change data “01h” is stored in the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 displays the count value C permutation that the counter 521 counts up and updates. The permutation is changed to a different permutation from when “01h” is not stored. In this case, when the numerical value permutation change data “01h” is stored, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 switches the update rule used for changing the permutation of the count values. In addition, when the counter 521 starts updating the count value after switching the update rule used for changing the count value permutation, the count value permutation change data in the count value permutation change register 536 is initialized from “01h” by the CPU 56. The value is returned to “0 (= 00h)” (cleared).

  Instead of clearing the count value permutation change data by the CPU 56, the random number circuit 503 may clear the count value permutation change data. For example, when the register value is set in the update rule selection register (RRC) 542 based on the count value permutation change data “01h” being written in the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 The register value of the count value permutation change register 536 may be cleared.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the update rule selection register 542. The update rule selection register 542 is a register that sets an update rule used for rearranging the order of count values output from the counter 521 (changing the permutation). In this embodiment, by setting a register value in the update rule selection register 542, an update rule used for changing the permutation of count values output by the counter 521 is set. As shown in FIG. 8, the update rule selection register 542 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. The update rule selection register 542 is configured in a state where bits 0 to 3 can be written and read. In addition, the update rule selection register 542 is configured in a state where bits 4 to 7 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write values to bits 4 to 7 of the update rule selection register 542, it is invalid, and all the values read from bits 4 to 7 are “0 (= 0000b)”.

  The value (register value) of the update rule selection register 542 is changed from “0 (= 00h)” to “15” in response to the count value permutation change data “01h” being written in the count value permutation change register 536. (= 0Fh) ”is updated cyclically. That is, each time the count value permutation data “01h” is written to the count value permutation change register 536, the register value of the update rule selection register 542 is incremented by “1” from “0”. Return to "0".

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the update rule memory 543. As shown in FIG. 9, the update rule memory 543 stores the value (register value) of the update rule selection register 542 and the count value update rule in association with each other. In the example shown in FIG. 9, for example, when the register value 1 is set in the update rule selection register 542, it can be seen that the permutation of the count values output by the counter 521 is changed using the update rule B. In FIG. 9, the update rule A is the same update rule as that by which the counter 521 updates the count value C, and is stored in the update rule memory 543 in association with the register value “0”. Also, in the update rule memory 543, update rules B to P different from the update rule in which the counter 521 updates the count value C are stored in association with the register values “1” to “15”.

  When the count value permutation change data “01h” is written in the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 first counts from the counter 521 until the final count value “4095” is first input. The count value is output as it is according to the currently set update rule. The count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the count value update rule when the final value “4095” of the count value is input from the counter 521. When the initial value is changed by the CPU 56, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 inputs the final value after the change (the value immediately before the initial value) from the counter 521, and updates the count value. Will be changed.

  The count value permutation change circuit 523 selects an update rule corresponding to the register value of the update rule selection register 542 from the update rule memory 543, and sets it as an update rule used for changing the count value permutation. The count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the permutation from the initial value of the count value to the final value according to the set update rule when the counter 521 starts updating the count value again from the initial value “0”. To do. When the initial value is changed by the CPU 56, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 starts counting in accordance with the set update rule when the counter 521 starts updating the count value in order from the changed initial value. The permutation from the initial value to the final value will be changed. Then, the count value permutation change circuit 523 outputs a count value according to the changed permutation.

  In this embodiment, when the maximum random number value to be generated is limited by setting the random number maximum value in the random number maximum value setting register 535 described later, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 counts The value C is limited to the maximum random number or less, and the permutation is changed and output. For example, it is assumed that the random number maximum value “256” is set in the random number maximum value setting register 535, and the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the update rule A to the update rule B to change the count value permutation. Shall. In this case, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the count value permutation to “256 → 255” according to the update rule B based on the random number maximum value “256” set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the comparator 522. → → → 0 "and output.

  As described above, when the count value permutation change data “01h” is written in the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 changes the update rule to use the permutation of the count value C. Change and output. Therefore, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be improved.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example in which the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the permutation of the count values output from the counter 521. As shown in FIG. 10, the CPU 56 writes the count value permutation change data “01h” into the count value permutation change register 536 at a predetermined timing. Then, 1 is added to the register value of the update rule selection register 542. For example, the register value of the update rule selection register 542 is updated from “0” to “1”. When the register value is updated, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 updates the “update rule A” corresponding to the register value “0” before the update until the final value “4095” of the count value is input from the counter 521 for the first time. The count value is updated according to "." At this time, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 outputs the count values in a permutation of “0 → 1 →... → 4095” according to the update rule A.

  When the final value “4095” of the count value is input from the counter 521, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 selects “update rule B” corresponding to the updated register value “1” from the update rule memory 543. To set. When the count value permutation changing circuit 523 starts to input the count values after the initial value “0” from the counter 521 again, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the permutation of the count values according to the selected “update rule B” and outputs it. In this example, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the permutation from “0 → 1 →... → 4095” to “4095 → 4094 →... → 0” and outputs the count value.

  Thereafter, the count value permutation change register 536 is reset in response to the count value permutation change circuit 523 starting the count value updating operation in accordance with the updated update rule, as will be described later. Then, until the next count value permutation change data “01h” is written to the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 counts the permutation as “4095 → 4094 →. Continue to output values.

  When the count value permutation change data “01h” is written again to the count value permutation change register 536 by the CPU 56, the register value of the count value permutation change register 536 is updated from “1” to “2”. When the final value “4095” of the count value is input from the counter 521, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 selects and sets “update rule C” corresponding to the register value “2” from the update rule memory 543. . When the count value permutation changing circuit 523 starts to input the count value after the initial value “0” again from the counter 521, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 updates and outputs the count value permutation in accordance with the “update rule C” selected and set. In this example, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the permutation from “4095 → 4094 →... → 0” to “1 → 3 →... → 4095 → 0 →. Is output.

  As described above, after the count value permutation change register 536 is reset, the count value permutation data “01h” is written again in the count value permutation change register 536, so that the count value permutation can be further changed.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the count value permutation change register 536. The count value permutation change register 536 is a register that sets count value permutation change data “01h” for changing the permutation of count values counted up by the counter 521. As shown in FIG. 11, the count value permutation change register 536 is a readable 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. Further, count value permutation change register 536 is configured such that only bit 0 can be written and read. That is, count value permutation change register 536 is configured such that bits 1 to 7 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write values to bits 1 to 7 of the count value permutation change register 536, it is invalid, and all the values read from bits 1 to 7 are “0 (= 0000000b)”.

  Note that the value of the count value permutation change register 536 is reset by the CPU 56 in response to the count value permutation change circuit 523 starting a count value update operation in accordance with the updated update rule. In this case, the CPU 56 returns the value written in the count value permutation change register 536 from the count value permutation change data “01h” to the initial value “0 (= 00h)”.

  The comparator 522 includes a random number maximum value setting register (RMX) 535 that stores random number maximum value setting data for designating the maximum value of random R (random number maximum value). The comparator 522 limits the update range of the count value updated by the counter 521 according to the random number maximum value indicated in the random number maximum value setting data stored in the random number maximum value setting register 535. In this embodiment, the comparator 522 has a random number maximum value (for example, “00FFh”) indicated by the count value input from the counter 521 and the random number maximum value setting data (for example, “00FFh”) stored in the random number maximum value setting register 535. 256 "). When the comparator 522 determines that the input count value is equal to or less than the random number maximum value, the comparator 522 outputs the input count value to the random value storage circuit 531.

  In this embodiment, the comparator 522 specifically performs the following control. The comparator 522 obtains the initial value of the count value from the CPU 56 when updating the initial value of the count value, and obtains the number of count values from the initial value to the maximum random number. For example, when the initial value of the count value is “157” and the maximum random number value is “256”, the comparator 522 calculates the number of count values from the initial value to the maximum random number value as “100”. The comparator 522 counts up how many count values have been input from the initial value as the count values are input from the count value permutation changing circuit 523. When the number of input count values from the initial value reaches “100”, the comparator 522 determines that all count values from the initial value “157” to the maximum value “256” have been input. Then, the comparator 522 outputs a notification signal indicating that all count values have been input to the counter 521. By determining based on the number of count values, even when the count value permutation circuit 523 has changed the count value permutation, the comparator 522 limits the update range of the count value to the maximum random number or less. When all count values are input, a notification signal can be output to the counter 521.

  An operation in which the comparator 522 limits the update range of the count value will be described. In this example, the case where the count value permutation changing circuit 523 selects the update rule A and the random number maximum value “256” is set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 will be described.

  While the counter 521 is updating the count value from “0” to “256”, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 updates based on the random number maximum value “256” set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. In accordance with rule A, the count values from “0” to “256” are output to the comparator 522 as they are. In this case, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 receives the value of the random number maximum value “256” from the comparator 522, determines whether the count value input from the counter 521 is larger than the random number maximum value, and the update rule is changed. Even when it is set (for example, update rule B), the count values from “257” to “4095” are compared based on the random number maximum value “256” set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. The data is not output to the device 522. For example, when the initial value is set to “0” and the count value is updated to the final value “256”, the counter 521 outputs a notification signal to the CPU 56. When the notification signal is output, the CPU 56 changes the initial value of the count value of the counter 521. In this example, it is assumed that the initial value is changed to “50” by the CPU 56.

  Note that the comparator 522 may determine whether the count value is greater than the random number maximum value “256”, instead of the count value permutation changing circuit 523. In this case, for example, the comparator 522 determines whether or not the count value is greater than the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535, and determines that the count value is greater than the random number maximum value. Is output to the counter 521. When the comparator 522 determines that the count value exceeds the random number maximum value, the comparator 522 outputs a notification signal to the counter 521 before the clock signal output circuit 524 next outputs the random number generation clock signal SI1. By doing so, the comparator 522 counts up the count value from “257” to “4095” at high speed until the clock signal output circuit 524 next outputs the random number generation clock signal SI1. Thus, the counter 521 is controlled. By doing so, the count value is output to the random value storage circuit 531 only when the value from the count value permutation changing circuit 523 is less than “257”, and the value from the count value permutation changing circuit 523 is “257”. When the value is greater than or equal to “,” the count value can be updated at high speed.

  Based on the update rule A, while the count value is input from “0” to “255” from the count value permutation changing circuit 523, the comparator 522 inputs the count value below the maximum random number “256”. Therefore, the input count value is output to the random value storage circuit 531 as it is. Next, when the count value input from the count value permutation changing circuit 523 reaches “256”, the comparator 522 outputs the input count value to the random value storage circuit 531 and all the values from the initial value to the maximum value. A notification signal indicating that the count value is input is output to the counter 521. Specifically, the comparator 522 receives an initial value (“0” in this example) of the count value from the CPU 56 when changing the initial value of the count value, and the random number maximum value (the main value) from the initial value “0”. In the example, the number of count values up to “256” (in this example, “257”) is obtained. When the number of count values input from the count value permutation changing circuit 523 reaches 257, a notification signal indicating that all count values have been input is output to the counter 521. In this example, since the CPU 56 changes the initial value to “50”, the counter 521 does not reset the count value even when the notification signal is input from the comparator 522, and the changed initial value “50”. The count value is updated.

  While the counter 521 updates the count value from the changed initial value “50” to “256”, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 sets the random number maximum value “256” set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. Based on the update rule A, the count values from “50” to “256” are output to the comparator 522 as they are. Further, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 does not output the count values from “257” to “4095” to the comparator 522 based on the random number maximum value “256” set in the random number maximum value setting register 535. When the count value to be updated by the counter 521 makes one round (when updated 257 times), when the count value permutation change data is written in the count value permutation change register 536, the count value permutation change circuit 523 Change the permutation of count values and output. For example, when the update rule is changed to the update rule B, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the count value permutation from “256 → 255 →... → 50” and outputs the result.

  While the count values from “256” to “50” are input from the count value permutation changing circuit 523, the comparator 522 outputs the input count value as it is to the random value storage circuit 531. Next, when the count value input from the count value permutation change circuit 523 reaches “50”, the comparator 522 outputs the input count value to the random value storage circuit 531 and all the values from the initial value to the maximum value. A notification signal indicating that the count value is input is output to the counter 521. Specifically, the comparator 522 receives the initial count value (“50” in this example) from the CPU 56 when the initial count value is changed, and the random number maximum value (this In the example, the number of count values up to “256” (in this example, “207”) is obtained. When the number of count values input from count value permutation changing circuit 523 reaches 207, a notification signal indicating that all count values have been input is output to counter 521.

  Even when the count value permutation changing circuit 523 changes the count value permutation, the comparator 522 outputs a notification signal to the counter 521 when the number of count values reaches 207. By doing so, even if the permutation of the count values is changed, the notification signal is counted based on the input of all the count values from the initial value “50” to the maximum value “256”. 521 can be output.

  When the notification signal is input from the comparator 522, the counter 521 resets the initial value of the count value and returns it to “0”. Then, the counter 521 updates the count value from “0”. When the value of the counter 521 is updated again from “0”, the count value permutation changing circuit 523 outputs the count values from “49” to “0” to the comparator 522 based on the count value from the counter 521. The comparator 522 outputs the count value to the random value storage circuit 531 based on the count value input from the count value permutation changing circuit 523. When the counter 521 updates the count value to the final value (“49” in this example), the counter 521 outputs a notification signal to the CPU 56. When the notification signal is output, the initial value of the count value of the counter 521 is changed again by the CPU 56.

  By repeating the operation as described above, the comparator 522 causes the counter 521 to continuously count up the count value from “0” to the random number maximum value “256”, and the value from “0” to “256”. Is stored in the random value storage circuit 531 as a random R (random number value). In other words, the comparator 522 limits the update range of the count value to the random number maximum value “256” or less, and causes the counter 521 to update the count value.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the random number maximum value setting register 535. FIG. 12A shows an example of the random number maximum value setting register 535 installed in the 12-bit random number circuit 503a. FIG. 12B shows an example of the random number maximum value setting register 535 installed in the 16-bit random number circuit 503b. First, the random number maximum value setting register 535 mounted in the 12-bit random number circuit 503a will be described. As shown in FIG. 12A, in the 12-bit random number circuit 503a, the random number maximum value setting register 535 is a 16-bit register, and the initial value is set to “4095 (= 0FFFh)”. The random number maximum value setting register 535 is configured so that bits 0 to 11 can be written and read. The random number maximum value setting register 535 is configured such that bits 12 to 15 cannot be written or read. Therefore, in the 12-bit random number circuit 503a, even if control is performed to write values to bits 12 to 15 of the random number maximum value setting register 535, the values read from bits 12 to 15 are all “0 (= 0000b)”. It is.

  The random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 has a predetermined lower limit value. In this embodiment, when random number maximum value setting data “0000h” to “00FEh” designating a value smaller than the lower limit value “256” is written in the random number maximum value setting register 535, the CPU 56 stores the random number maximum value setting register. The random number maximum value setting data “0FFFh” for specifying the initial value “4095” is set again in 535. That is, the random number maximum value that can be set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 is from “256” to “4095”, and when the CPU 56 determines that a value smaller than the lower limit value “256” is set, the random number maximum value Is reset to a predetermined value “4095”. The CPU 56 controls the random number maximum value setting register 535 in which the random number maximum value setting data is written to be unwritable until the game control microcomputer 560 is system reset by the reset controller 502. Instead of controlling the CPU 56 to disable writing, the random number maximum value setting register 535 may be formed so that writing is not possible until a reset signal is input after data is written.

  Next, the random number maximum value setting register 535 mounted in the 16-bit random number circuit 503b will be described. As shown in FIG. 12B, in the 16-bit random number circuit 503b, the random number maximum value setting register 535 is a 16-bit register, and the initial value is set to “65535 (= FFFFh)”. Further, in the 16-bit random number circuit 503b, the random number maximum value setting register 535 is configured in a state in which all bits 0 to 15 can be written and read.

  When random number maximum value setting data “0000h” to “00FEh” for designating a value smaller than the lower limit value “512” is written in the random number maximum value setting register 535, the CPU 56 stores the initial value in the random number maximum value setting register 535. The random number maximum value setting data “FFFFh” specifying the value “65535” is reset. That is, the random number maximum value that can be set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 is from “512” to “65535”, and when the CPU 56 determines that a value smaller than the lower limit value “512” is set, the random number maximum value Is reset to a predetermined value “65535”. The CPU 56 controls the random number maximum value setting register 535 in which the random number maximum value setting data is written to be unwritable until the game control microcomputer 560 is system reset by the reset controller 502. In this case, the random number maximum value setting register 535 may be formed not to be writable until a reset signal is input after data is written, instead of being controlled so as not to be writable by the CPU 56.

  The clock signal output circuit 524 includes a cycle setting register (RPS) 537 for storing cycle setting data for designating the cycle of the clock signal output to the selector 528 and the inverting circuit 532 (that is, the count value update cycle). The clock signal output circuit 524 divides the reference clock signal CLK input from the clock circuit 501 mounted on the game control microcomputer 560 based on the cycle setting data stored in the cycle setting register 537, and generates a random number circuit. A clock signal (random number generating clock signal SI1) used to generate a random number value is generated inside 503. By doing so, the clock signal output circuit 524 operates to output the random number generation clock signal SI1 for updating the count value C to the counter 521 on condition that the clock signal has been input a predetermined number of times. . The period setting data is data for setting how many times the reference clock signal CLK input from the clock circuit 501 is to be divided. The clock output circuit 524 outputs the generated random number generating clock signal SI1 to the selector 528 and the inverting circuit 532. For example, when the cycle setting data “0Fh (= 16)” is written in the cycle setting register 537, the clock signal output circuit 524 divides the reference clock signal CLK input from the clock circuit 501 by 16, and generates random numbers. A clock signal SI1 is generated. In this case, the cycle of the random number generating clock signal SI1 generated by the clock signal output circuit 524 is “cycle of system clock signal × 128 × 16”.

  FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the cycle setting register 537. As shown in FIG. 13, the period setting register 537 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “256 (= FFh)”. The cycle setting register 537 is configured in a state where both writing and reading are possible.

  In addition, a predetermined lower limit value is determined for the value of the cycle setting data set in the cycle setting register 537. In this embodiment, when the cycle setting data “00h to 06h” designating a value smaller than the lower limit value “system clock signal cycle × 128 × 7” is written in the cycle setting register 537, the CPU 56 In 537, the cycle setting data “07h” for specifying the lower limit value “system clock signal cycle × 128 × 7” is reset. That is, the period that can be set in the period setting register 537 is “system clock signal period × 128 × 7” to “system clock signal period × 128 × 256”, and the CPU 56 is set to a value smaller than the lower limit value. If it is determined that the cycle setting data is correct, the cycle setting data is reset. The CPU 56 controls the period setting register 537 in which the period setting data is written to be unwritable until the game control microcomputer 560 is system-reset by the reset controller 502. Instead of controlling the CPU 56 to disable writing, the period setting register 537 may be formed so that writing is not possible until a reset signal is input after data is written.

  Note that, without setting the cycle setting data as the lower limit value in the cycle setting register 537, based on the set cycle setting data, for example, the clock signal output circuit 524 directly supplies the reference clock signal CLK to the counter 521 and the inverting circuit 532. You may make it output. In this case, the CPU 56 does not need to perform processing for setting the value of the cycle setting data set in the cycle setting register 537 by comparing it with the lower limit value. The counter 521 updates the count value C every time the reference clock signal CLK is input from the clock signal output circuit 524.

  The count value update signal output circuit 525 includes a count value update register (RGN) 538 that stores count value update data “01h”. The count value update data is data for requesting update of the count value. The count value update signal output circuit 525 outputs the count value update signal SI3 to the selector 528 in response to the count value update data “01h” being written in the count value update register 538.

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the count value update register 538. As shown in FIG. 14, the count value update register 538 is an unreadable 8-bit register, and is configured so that only bit 0 can be written. Therefore, even if control is performed to write a value to bits 1 to 7 of the count value update register 538, it is invalidated.

  The random value read signal output circuit 526 includes a random value take-in register (RLT) 539 for storing random value take-in data “01h”. The random value acquisition data is data for requesting acquisition of the count value to the random value storage circuit 531. The random value read signal output circuit 526 generates a random value read signal for requesting reading of the random value in response to the random value fetch data “01h” being written in the random value fetch register 539. Output to the circuit 533.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the random value fetch register 539. As shown in FIG. 15, the random value fetch register 539 is an unreadable 8-bit register. The random value fetch register 539 is configured so that only bit 0 can be written. In other words, even if control is performed to write a value to bits 1 to 7 of the random value fetch register 539, it is invalidated.

  The random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 includes a random number update method selection register (RTS) 540 that stores random number update method selection data. The random number update method selection data is data for designating one of the random number update methods that is a method for updating the value of the random R. The random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 responds to the random number update method selection data written in the random number update method selection register 540 with a random number corresponding to the random number update method specified by the written random number update method selection data. The update method selection signal is output to the selector 528 and the latch signal generation circuit 533.

  FIG. 16A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the random number update method selection register 540. As shown in FIG. 16A, the random number update method selection register 540 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “00h”. The random number update method selection register 540 is configured in a state where bits 0 to 1 can be written and read. The random number update method selection register 540 is configured in a state where bits 2 to 7 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write a value to bits 2 to 7 of the random number update method selection register 540, it is invalid, and all the values read from bits 2 to 7 are “0 (= 000000b)”.

  FIG. 16B is an explanatory diagram of an example of random number update method selection data written to the random number update method selection register 540. As shown in FIG. 16B, the random number update method selection data is composed of 2-bit data. The random number update method selection data “01b” is used to specify the first random number update method. The random number update method selection data “10b” is used to specify the second random number update method. In this embodiment, the first random number update method is a method of updating the count value triggered by the output of the count value update signal SI3 from the count value update signal output circuit 525. The second random number update method is a method of updating the count value triggered by the output of the random number generating clock signal SI1 from the clock signal output circuit 524. Further, when the random number update method selection data “01b” or “10b” is written in the random number update method selection register 540, the random number circuit 503 is ready to be activated. On the other hand, when the random number update method selection data “00b” or “11b” is written to the random number update method selection register 540, the random number circuit 503 cannot be activated.

  The selector 528 selects either the count value update signal SI 3 output from the count value update signal output circuit 525 or the random number generation clock signal SI 1 output from the clock signal output circuit 524 and outputs the selected signal to the counter 521. When a random number update method selection signal (also referred to as a first random number update method selection signal) corresponding to the first random number update method is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the selector 528 outputs a count value update signal. The count value update signal SI3 output from the circuit 525 is selected and output to the counter 521. On the other hand, when a random number update method selection signal (also referred to as a second random number update method selection signal) corresponding to the second random number update method is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the selector 528 outputs a clock signal. The random number generation clock signal SI 1 output from the circuit 524 is selected and output to the counter 521. When the first update method selection signal is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the selector 528 receives a clock signal according to the count value update signal SI3 output from the count value update signal output circuit 525. A numerical value update instruction signal for instructing update of numerical data synchronized with the random number generation clock signal SI1 output from the output circuit 524 may be output to the counter 521.

  The random number circuit activation signal output circuit 530 includes a random number circuit activation register (RST) 541 that stores random number circuit activation data “80h”. The random circuit activation data is data for requesting activation of the random number circuit 503. When the random number circuit activation data “80h” is written in the random number circuit activation register 541, the random number circuit activation signal output circuit 530 outputs a predetermined random number circuit activation signal to the counter 521 and the clock signal output circuit 537, and the counter 521 and the clock The signal output circuit 524 is turned on. The random number circuit 503 is activated by starting the count value updating operation by the counter 521 and the internal clock signal output operation by the clock signal output circuit 524.

  FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the random number circuit activation register 541. As shown in FIG. 17, the random number circuit activation register 541 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “00h”. The random number circuit activation register 541 is configured such that only bit 7 can be written and read. The random number circuit activation register 541 is configured in a state in which bits 0 to 6 cannot be written or read. That is, even if control is performed to write a value to bit 0 to bit 6 of the random number circuit activation register 541, it is invalid, and all the values read from bit 0 to bit 6 are “0 (= 000000b)”.

  The random value storage circuit 531 is a 16-bit register, for example, and stores a random R value that is a random number used in the jackpot determination in the game control process. The random value storage circuit 531 stores the count value C output from the counter 521 via the comparator 522 as a random R value in response to the input of the latch signal SL from the latch signal generation circuit 533. Each time the latch signal SL is input from the latch signal generation circuit 533, the random value storage circuit 531 reads the count value C updated by the counter 521 and stores the random R value.

  FIG. 18 is a circuit diagram showing a configuration example of the random value storage circuit 531. As shown in FIG. 18, the random value storage circuit 531 includes two AND circuits 201 and 203, two NOT circuits 202 and 204, 16 flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116, and 16 OR circuits. 2201-2216.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the input terminal of the AND circuit 201 is connected to the output terminal of the latch signal generation circuit 533 and the output terminal of the NOT circuit 204, and the output terminal is connected to the input terminal of the NOT circuit 202 and the flip-flop circuit 2101. Are connected to clock terminals Clk1 to Clk16. The input terminal of the NOT circuit 202 is connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit 201, and the output terminal is connected to one input terminal of the AND circuit 203.

  The input terminal of the AND circuit 203 is connected to the output terminal of the NOT circuit 202 and the CPU 56 mounted on the game control microcomputer 560, and the output terminal is connected to the input terminal of the NOT circuit 204. The input terminal of the NOT circuit 204 is connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit 203, and the output terminal is connected to one input terminal of the AND circuit 201 and one input terminal of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216.

  Input terminals D1 to D16 of the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116 are connected to an output terminal of the comparator 522. The clock terminals Clk1 to Clk16 of the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116 are connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit 201, and the output terminals Q1 to Q16 are connected to the other input terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216.

  The input terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 are connected to the output terminal of the NOT circuit 204 and the output terminals of the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116, and the output terminals are connected to the CPU 56 mounted on the game control microcomputer 560. .

  The operation of the random value storage circuit 531 will be described. FIG. 19 is a timing chart showing the timing at which each signal is input to the random value storage circuit 531 and the timing at which the random value storage circuit 531 outputs each signal. As shown in FIG. 19, when the output control signal SC (high level signal in this example) is not input from the CPU 56 mounted in the game control microcomputer 560 (that is, to one input terminal of the AND circuit 203). When the latch signal SL is input from the latch signal generation circuit 533 (when the input is at the low level) (at the timings T1, T2, and T7 in the example shown in FIG. 19), the two input terminals of the AND circuit 201 are connected. Both inputs are high. Therefore, the signal SR output from the output terminal of the AND circuit 201 is at a high level. The signal SR output from the AND circuit 201 is input to the clock terminals Clk1 to Clk16 of the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116.

  The flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116 respond to the rising edges of the signal SR input from the clock terminals Clk1 to Clk16, and receive the bit data C1 to C1 of the count value C input from the comparator 522 via the input terminals D1 to D16. C16 is latched and stored as bit data R1 to R16 of a random value. The flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116 output random R bit data R1 to R16 to be stored from the output terminals Q1 to Q16.

  When the output control signal SC is not input (in the example shown in FIG. 19, the period up to the timing T3 and the period after the timing T6), the input to one input terminal of the AND circuit 203 is at the low level. The signal SG output from the output terminal of the circuit 203 is at a low level. The signal SG output from the AND circuit 203 is inverted in the NOT circuit 204 to be a high level signal. A high level signal is input from the NOT circuit 204 to one input terminal of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216.

  As described above, since the input to one of the input terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 is at a high level, the OR is input regardless of whether the signal input to the other input terminal is at a high level or a low level. The circuits 2201 to 2216 output high level signals. That is, the signals SO1 to SO16 output from the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 are all at a high level regardless of whether the values of the input random R bit data R1 to R16 are “0” or “1”. (“1”). By doing so, the value output from the random value storage circuit 531 is always “65535 (= 1111111111111111b)”, and the random R cannot be read from the random value storage circuit 531. That is, even if an attempt is made to read a random number from the random value storage circuit 531, only the same value “65535” can always be read from the random value storage circuit 531, and when the output control signal SC is not input, the random value storage circuit 531 becomes an unreadable (disabled) state. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is used, the value “65535” as the random number value may be used. In this case, even if the game control microcomputer 560 reads the value “65535”, it cannot determine whether the value is a random number or an unreadable state. Therefore, in the determination table for each jackpot determination shown in FIG. 38, when the random R is “65535”, it may be set to determine “lost” in advance.

  When the output control signal SC is input from the CPU 56 when the latch signal SL is not input from the latch signal generation circuit 533 (in the example shown in FIG. 19, the period from the timing T4 to the timing T6), Since the inputs to the two input terminals are both at the high level, the signal SG output from the output terminal of the AND circuit 203 is at the high level. The signal SG output from the AND circuit 203 is inverted in the NOT circuit 204 to be a low level signal. A low level signal is input from the NOT circuit 204 to one input terminal of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216.

  As described above, since the input to one input terminal of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 is at a low level, when the signal input to the other input terminal is at a high level, the output from the output terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 is high. A level signal is output. In addition, when a signal input to the other input terminal of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 is at a low level, a low level signal is output from the OR circuits 2201 to 2216. That is, the values of the random R bit data R1 to R16 input to the other input terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 are unchanged from the output terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 (that is, the values of the bit data R1 to R16 are “ “1” is output when it is “1” and “0” when it is “0”). By doing so, random R can be read from the random value storage circuit 531. That is, when the output control signal SC is input, the random value storage circuit 531 is in a readable (enable) state.

  However, if the latch signal SL is input from the latch signal generation circuit 533 before the output control signal SC is input from the CPU 56, the input to one input terminal of the AND circuit 203 is at a low level. Even if the output control signal SC is input in the state where the signal SL is input (in the example shown in FIG. 19, the signal SG is output from the output terminal of the AND circuit 203). Remains low. The signal SG output from the AND circuit 203 is inverted in the NOT circuit 204 to be a high level signal. A high level signal is input from the NOT circuit 204 to one input terminal of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216.

  As described above, since the input to one of the input terminals of the OR circuits 2201 to 2216 is at a high level, the OR is input regardless of whether the signal input to the other input terminal is at a high level or a low level. The signals SO1 to SO16 output from the circuits 2201 to 2216 are all at a high level. Even though the output control signal SC is input, the random R cannot be read from the random value storage circuit 531. That is, when the latch signal SL is input, the random value storage circuit 531 cannot receive the output control signal SC. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is used, the value “65535” as the random number value may be used. In this case, even if the game control microcomputer 560 reads the value “65535”, it cannot determine whether the value is a random number or an unreadable state. Therefore, in the determination table for each jackpot determination shown in FIG. 38, when the random R is “65535”, it may be set to determine “lost” in advance.

  In addition, when the output control signal SC is input from the CPU 56 before the latch signal SL is input from the latch signal generation circuit 533, the input to one input terminal of the AND circuit 201 is at a low level. Even if the latch signal SL is input while the control signal SC is being input (timing T5 in the example shown in FIG. 19), the signal SR output from the output terminal of the AND circuit 201 remains at the low level. It becomes. Therefore, the signal SR input to the clock terminals Clk1 to Clk16 of the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116 does not rise from the low level to the high level, and the random R bit data R1 to R16 stored in the flip-flop circuits 2101 to 2116. Although the latch signal SL is input, the stored random number is not updated. That is, when the output control signal SC is input, the random value storage circuit 531 cannot receive the latch signal SL.

  The inverting circuit 532 generates the inverted clock signal SI2 in which the polarity of the clock signal is inverted by inverting the signal level in the random number generating clock signal SI1 input from the clock signal output circuit 524. Further, the inverting circuit 532 outputs the generated inverted clock signal SI2 to the latch signal generating circuit 533.

  Note that the random number circuit 503 may include a delay circuit instead of the inverting circuit 532. In this case, the delay circuit generates a delayed clock signal obtained by delaying the clock signal by delaying the random number generating clock signal SI1 input from the clock signal output circuit 524. The delay circuit outputs the generated delayed clock signal to the latch signal generation circuit 533. Therefore, the latch signal generation circuit 533 outputs a latch signal to the random value storage circuit 531 in synchronization with the delayed clock signal obtained by delaying the random number generation clock signal SI1.

  The latch signal generation circuit 533 is configured using a selector, a flip-flop circuit, and the like. The latch signal generation circuit 533 receives the random number read signal from the random number read signal output circuit 526 and the inverted clock signal SI2 from the inversion circuit 532, and stores the random value in the random value storage circuit 531. SL is output. The latch signal generation circuit 533 outputs the latch signal SL in accordance with the random value update method designated by the random number update method selection signal from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527. In this case, when the first random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 receives the first random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the latch signal generation circuit 533 selects the inverted clock signal SI2 output from the inversion circuit 532, and the latch signal It outputs to the random value storage circuit 531 as SL. On the other hand, when the second random number update method selection signal is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the latch signal generation circuit 533 inverts the random value read signal output from the random value read signal output circuit 526. In synchronization with the rising edge of the inverted clock signal SI2 output from the circuit 532, the latch signal SL is output to the random value storage circuit 531.

  The timer circuit 534 inputs a winning detection signal SS indicating that a winning of a game ball to the starting port 14 has been detected from the starting port switch 14a. The timer circuit 534 measures the time during which the winning detection signal SS is continuously input from the start port switch 14a. Then, when the measurement time reaches a predetermined period (for example, 3 ms), the timer circuit 534 writes the random number value capture data “01h” in the random value capture register 539 of the random value read signal output circuit 526. For example, the timer circuit 534 is configured by an up counter or a down counter that is activated in response to the input of a high level signal. The timer circuit 534 receives the reference clock signal CLK sequentially input from the clock circuit 501 while the input from the start port switch 14a is at a high level (that is, while the winning detection signal SS is continuously input). Count up or down. Then, when the count value to be counted up or down reaches a value corresponding to 3 ms, the timer circuit 534 determines that the winning detection signal SS is input from the start port switch 14a, and receives the random number value capture data “01h”. Write to the random value fetch register 539.

  Next, the configuration of the serial communication circuit 505 will be described. The serial communication circuit 505 is a data format using a full duplex method, an asynchronous method, and standard NRZ (non-return zero) encoding, Perform serial communication. The serial communication circuit 505 includes a transmission unit that transmits various data (for example, a prize ball number command and an effect control command) to the microcomputer of each control board, and various data (for example, a prize ball ACK) from the microcomputer of each control board. Command).

  FIG. 20 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the transmission unit of the serial communication circuit 505. FIG. 21 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the receiving unit of the serial communication circuit 505. The serial communication circuit 505 includes a baud rate register 702, a baud rate generation circuit 703, two status registers 705 and 706, three control registers 707, 708, and 709, a transmission data register 710, a reception data register 711, a transmission shift register 712, and a reception. Shift register 713, interrupt control circuit 714, transmission format / parity generation circuit 715, and reception format / parity check circuit 716. As shown in FIG. 20, the transmission unit of the serial communication circuit 505 includes a baud rate register 702, a baud rate generation circuit 703, a status register A 705, control registers 707, 708, and 709, and a transmission data register 710, among these components. , A transmission shift register 712, an interrupt control circuit 714, and a transmission format / parity generation circuit 715. As shown in FIG. 21, the receiving unit of the serial communication circuit 505 includes a baud rate register 702, a baud rate generation circuit 703, status registers 705 and 706, control registers 707, 708, and 709, received data, among these components. The register 711, the reception shift register 713, the interrupt control circuit 714, and the reception format / parity check circuit 716 are configured.

  In the serial communication circuit 505, the transmission unit and the reception unit are actually configured using a common circuit. As described above, the serial communication circuit 505 functions as a transmission circuit or a reception circuit by properly using each component of the serial communication circuit 505.

  First, the data format of data transmitted and received by the serial communication circuit 505 with the microcomputer mounted on each control board will be described. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a data format of data transmitted and received by the serial communication 505 to and from the microcomputer mounted on each control board. As shown in FIG. 22, the data format of data transmitted and received by the serial communication circuit 505 is configured with a start bit, data, and stop bits as one frame. Further, the data length of data transmitted / received by the serial communication circuit 505 can be set to either 8 bits or 9 bits by performing an initial setting in a serial communication circuit setting process described later. FIG. 22A shows an example of a data format when the data length is set to 8 bits. FIG. 22B shows an example of the data format when the data length is set to 9 bits.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the data format of data transmitted and received by the serial communication circuit 505 is a start bit (logic “0”) indicating the start of one frame after an idle line of high level (logic “1”). ")including. The data format includes 8-bit or 9-bit transmission / reception data after the start bit. The data format includes a stop bit (logic “1”) indicating the end of one frame after transmission / reception data.

  The serial communication circuit 505 transmits / receives data first from the least significant bit (bit 0) of the transmission / reception data according to the data format shown in FIG. Further, if initial setting is performed in a serial communication circuit setting process described later, it is possible to set so that a parity bit is added to transmission / reception data. When a setting is made to add a parity bit, the most significant bit of the transmission / reception data is used as a parity bit (odd parity or even parity). For example, when the data length is set to 8 bits, bit 7 of transmission / reception data is used as a parity bit. For example, when the data length is set to 9 bits, bit 8 of transmission / reception data is used as a parity bit.

  The baud rate generation circuit 703 generates a baud rate used by the serial communication circuit 505 based on a clock signal output from the clock circuit 501 and a setting value (also referred to as a baud rate setting value) set in the baud rate register 702. In this case, the baud rate generation circuit 703 obtains the baud rate using a predetermined calculation formula based on the clock signal and the baud rate setting value. For example, the baud rate generation circuit 703 obtains the baud rate used by the serial communication circuit 505 using equation (1).

Baud rate = clock frequency / (baud rate set value x 16) Equation (1)

  FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the baud rate register 702. The baud rate register 702 is a register that sets a predetermined setting value for designating a baud rate value generated by the baud rate generation circuit 703. For example, it is assumed that the baud rate register 702 obtains the baud rate using the equation (1) and the clock frequency is 3 MHz. In this case, if the desired target baud rate is 1200 bps, the setting value “156” is set in the baud rate register 702. Then, the baud rate generation circuit 703 generates the baud rate “1201.92 bps” using the equation (1) based on the clock frequency “3 MHz” and the baud rate set value “156”. The baud rate register 702 is a 16-bit register, and an initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. The baud rate register 702 is configured such that bits 0 to 12 can be written and read. Further, the baud rate register 702 is configured such that bits 13 to 15 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if a control for writing a value to bits 13 to 15 of the baud rate register 702 is performed, it is invalid, and all the values read from the bits 13 to 15 are “0 (= 000b)”.

  FIG. 24A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the control register A707. The control register A 707 is a register for setting the communication format of the serial communication circuit 505. In this embodiment, the communication format of the serial communication circuit 505 is set by setting the value of each bit of the control register A707. In the control register A707, communication format setting data for setting a communication format such as a data format of transmission / reception data and various communication methods is set. As shown in FIG. 24A, the control register A707 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. Control register A 707 is configured such that bits 0 to 4 can be written and read. Control register A 707 is configured such that bits 5 to 7 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write a value to bits 5 to 7 of the control register A707, it is invalid, and all the values read from bits 5 to 7 are “0 (= 000b)”.

  FIG. 24B is an explanatory diagram of an example of communication format setting data set in the control register A707. As shown in FIG. 24B, setting data for setting the data length of data to be transmitted and received is set in bit 4 (bit name “M”) of the control register A707. As shown in FIG. 24B, by setting bit 4 to “0”, the data length of the transmission / reception data is set to 8 bits. Further, by setting bit 4 to “1”, the data length of the transmission / reception data is set to 9 bits.

  In bit 3 (bit name “WAKE”) of control register A707, setting data for setting a wake-up method for waking up a receiver circuit in the standby state (reception unit of serial communication circuit 505). Is set. As shown in FIG. 24 (B), by setting bit 3 to “0”, an idle line wakeup method is set which wakes up when an idle line is recognized. In addition, by setting bit 3 to “1”, an address mark wakeup method for wakeup by recognizing a predetermined address mark is set.

  In bit 2 (bit name “ILT”) of the control register A707, setting data for selecting an idle line detection method of received data is set. As shown in FIG. 24B, by setting bit 2 to “0”, a detection method for detecting the idle line after the start bit included in the received data is set. In addition, by setting bit 2 to “1”, a detection method for detecting an idle line after a stop bit included in received data is set.

  Setting data for setting whether or not to use the parity function is set in bit 1 (bit name “PE”) of the control register A707. As shown in FIG. 24B, the parity function is not used by setting bit 1 to “0”. Further, by setting bit 1 to “1”, the parity function is set to be used.

  Setting data for setting the type of parity when the parity function is used is set in bit 0 (bit name “PT”) of the control register A707. As shown in FIG. 24B, by setting bit 0 to “0”, even parity is set as the parity type. Also, by setting bit 0 to “1”, odd parity is set as the parity type.

  FIG. 25A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the control register B708. The control register B 708 is a register for setting whether to permit an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505. In this embodiment, whether the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 is permitted or prohibited is set by setting the value of each bit of the control register B708. In the control register B708, interrupt request setting data indicating whether or not various interrupt requests are permitted is mainly set. In addition to the interrupt request setting data, setting data for performing various settings of the serial communication circuit 505 is also set in the control register B708. As shown in FIG. 25A, the control register B708 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. Control register B 708 is configured such that bits 0 to 7 can be written and read.

  FIG. 25B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of interrupt request setting data set in the control register B708. As shown in FIG. 25 (B), setting data indicating whether or not a transmission interrupt request, which is an interrupt request to be performed at the time of data transmission, is permitted is set in bit 7 (bit name “TIE”) of the control register B708. Is done. As shown in FIG. 25B, by setting bit 7 to “0”, the transmission interrupt request is set to be prohibited. Also, by setting bit 7 to “1”, the transmission interrupt request is set to be permitted.

  Bit 6 (bit name “TCIE”) of the control register B708 is set with setting data indicating whether or not to permit a transmission completion interrupt request, which is an interrupt request to be made when data transmission is completed. As shown in FIG. 25B, by setting bit 6 to “0”, the transmission completion interrupt request is set to be prohibited. Also, by setting bit 6 to “1”, the transmission completion interrupt request is set to be permitted.

  Bit 5 (bit name “RIE”) of the control register B 708 is set with setting data indicating whether or not a reception interrupt request, which is an interrupt request when data is received, is permitted. As shown in FIG. 25B, by setting bit 5 to “0”, the reception interrupt request is set to be prohibited. Further, by setting bit 5 to “1”, the reception interrupt request is set to be permitted.

  Bit 4 (bit name “ILIE”) of the control register B708 is set with setting data indicating whether or not an idle line interrupt request that is an interrupt request to be performed when an idle line of received data is detected is permitted. As shown in FIG. 25B, by setting bit 4 to “0”, the idle line interrupt request is set to be prohibited. Further, by setting bit 4 to “1”, it is set to permit an idle line interrupt request.

  In bit 3 (bit name “TE”) of the control register B708, setting data indicating whether to use the transmission circuit (the transmission unit of the serial communication circuit 505) is set. As shown in FIG. 25B, by setting bit 3 to “0”, the transmission circuit is set not to be used. Further, by setting bit 3 to “1”, the transmission circuit is set to be used.

  In bit 2 (bit name “RE”) of the control register B708, setting data indicating whether or not to use the receiving circuit is set. As shown in FIG. 25B, by setting bit 2 to “0”, the receiving circuit is set not to be used. Further, by setting bit 2 to “1”, the receiving circuit is set to be used.

  Setting data indicating whether or not to use the wakeup function of the receiving circuit is set in bit 1 (bit name “RWU”) of the control register B708. As shown in FIG. 25 (B), by setting bit 1 to “0”, the wakeup function is set not to be used. Further, by setting bit 1 to “1”, the wakeup function is set to be used.

  Setting data indicating whether or not to use a predetermined break code transmission function is set in bit 0 (bit name “SBK”) of the control register B708. As shown in FIG. 25B, by setting bit 1 to “0”, the break code transmission function is set not to be used. Further, by setting bit 1 to “1”, the break code transmission function is set to be used. When bit 1 is set to “1”, the serial communication circuit 505 causes the microcomputer on which the control board (the payout control board 37 and the effect control board 80) is mounted with a break code (for example, a signal including “0” continuously). Send to.

  FIG. 26A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the status register A705. The status register A 705 is a register for confirming various statuses of the serial communication circuit 505. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 can confirm various statuses of the serial communication circuit 505 by confirming the value of each bit of the status register A 705. As shown in FIG. 26A, the status register A705 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. In addition, the status register A705 is configured so that bits 0 to 7 can only be read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write a value to bit 0 to bit 7 of the status register A705, it is invalidated.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, when transmission data is not stored in the transmission data register 710 (transmission data empty) or transmission of transmission data stored in the transmission shift register 712 is completed, interrupt control is performed. Circuit 714 sets the corresponding bit in status register A705. Then, the CPU 56 reads the value of each bit set in the status register A705.

  FIG. 26B is a diagram showing an example of status confirmation data stored in the status register A705. As shown in FIG. 26B, transmission data indicating that transmission data is not stored in transmission data register 710 (transmission data empty) in bit 7 (bit name “TDRE”) of status register A705. Stores an empty flag. As shown in FIG. 26B, when “0” is stored in bit 7, the transmission data is not yet transferred from the transmission data register 710 to the transmission shift register 712, and transmitted to the transmission data register 710. Indicates that the data is still stored. When “1” is stored in bit 7, the transmission data is transferred from the transmission data register 710 to the transmission shift register 712, and there is no transmission data in the transmission data register 710 (transmission data empty). ).

  Bit 6 (bit name “TC”) of the status register A 705 stores a transmission completion flag indicating that transmission of transmission data from the serial communication circuit 505 has been completed. As shown in FIG. 26B, when “0” is stored in bit 6, the transmission data stored in the transmission shift register 712 is being transmitted, and the transmission data from the serial communication circuit 505 is not transmitted. Indicates that transmission has not been completed. Further, when “1” is stored in bit 6, the transmission data stored in the transmission shift register 712 has been transferred, and transmission of transmission data from the serial communication circuit 505 has been completed. It shows that.

  Note that the transmission of the transmission data is completed, and the game control microcomputer 560 waits for a reception confirmation signal from the transmission destination microcomputer. In this embodiment, when a transmission interrupt is set as will be described later, the serial communication circuit 505 sets the bit 6 of the status register A 705 to “1” and confirms reception when detecting the completion of transmission of transmission data. An interrupt request (referred to as an interrupt request during transmission) is made to the CPU 56 as a signal waiting state.

  Bit 5 (bit name “RDRF”) of status register A 705 stores a reception data full flag indicating that reception data is stored in reception data register 711 (reception data full). As shown in FIG. 26B, when “0” is stored in bit 5, it indicates that the reception data register 711 contains no reception data. When “1” is stored in bit 5, the value of the reception shift register 713 is transferred to the reception data register 711, and reception data is stored in the reception data register 711 (reception data Full).

  When the reception data is stored in the reception data register 711, the CPU 56 is ready to perform reception processing by reading the reception data from the reception data register 711. In this embodiment, when the serial communication circuit 505 detects that the received data is full, the bit 5 of the status register A 705 is set to “1” and an interrupt request (interrupt upon reception) is made to the CPU 56 that reception processing is possible. Request).

  Bit 4 (bit name “IDLE”) of status register A705 stores an idle line detection flag indicating that the receiving circuit has detected an idle line. As shown in FIG. 26B, when “0” is stored in bit 4, it indicates that the receiving unit of the serial communication circuit 505 has not detected an idle line. When “1” is stored in bit 4, it indicates that the receiving unit of the serial communication circuit 505 has detected an idle line.

  In bit 3 (bit name “OR”) of the status register A 705, the reception shift register 713 has received the next data before the CPU 56 reads the reception data stored in the reception data register 711 (overload). An overrun flag indicating (run) is stored. As shown in FIG. 26B, when “0” is stored in bit 3, it indicates that the receiving circuit has not detected an overrun. If “1” is stored in bit 3, it indicates that the receiving circuit has detected an overrun.

  If an overrun occurs, the next received data is stored in the receiving shift register 713 before the received data in the received data register 711 is read, so that the received data is overwritten and the CPU 56 receives the received data. It cannot be read correctly. For this reason, communication with the microcomputer mounted on each control board cannot be performed correctly, causing the CPU 56 to malfunction. In this embodiment, when detecting an overrun, the serial communication circuit 505 sets bit 3 of the status register A 705 to “1” and issues an interrupt request to the CPU 56 as an error has occurred during communication.

  Bit 2 (bit name “NF”) of status register A 705 stores a noise error flag indicating that noise has been detected in the received data. As shown in FIG. 26B, when “0” is stored in bit 2, it indicates that the receiving circuit is not detecting noise in the received data. Further, when “1” is stored in bit 2, it indicates that the receiving circuit has detected noise in the received data.

  For example, when detecting each bit of the received data, the serial communication circuit 505 detects “1” or “0” having a predetermined bit length using the baud rate generated by the baud rate generation circuit 703. In this case, when the detected length of “1” or “0” is less than the predetermined bit length, the serial communication circuit 505 detects a noise error as noise generated in the received data. When a noise error occurs, there is a high possibility that correct received data cannot be received due to the noise, which causes the CPU 56 to malfunction. In this embodiment, when detecting a noise error, the serial communication circuit 505 sets bit 2 of the status register A 705 to “1” and issues an interrupt request to the CPU 56 as an error has occurred during communication.

  Bit 1 (bit name “FE”) of the status register A 705 indicates that it is detected that the position of the stop bit of the received data is “0” (originally, the stop bit is “1”) (framing error). A framing error flag is stored. As shown in FIG. 26B, when “0” is stored in bit 1, it indicates that the receiving circuit has not detected a framing error in the received data. When “1” is stored in bit 1, it indicates that the receiving circuit has detected a framing error.

  When a framing error occurs, it is in a state where the stop bit of the received data has not been correctly received, and therefore there is a high possibility that correct received data cannot be received, causing the CPU 56 to malfunction. In this embodiment, when detecting a framing error, the serial communication circuit 505 sets bit 1 of the status register A 705 to “1” and issues an interrupt request to the CPU 56 as an error has occurred during communication.

  Bit 0 (bit name “PF”) of the status register A 705 has a parity error flag indicating that the parity value obtained from the received data does not match the parity value included in the received data (parity error). Is stored. As shown in FIG. 26B, when “0” is stored in bit 0, it indicates that the receiving circuit has not detected a parity error in the received data. Further, when “1” is stored in bit 0, it indicates that the receiving circuit has detected a parity error.

  When a parity error occurs, it is in a state where each data bit or parity bit of the received data has not been correctly received, so there is a high possibility that correct received data cannot be received, causing the CPU 56 to malfunction. In this embodiment, when the serial communication circuit 505 detects a parity error, the serial communication circuit 505 sets bit 0 of the status register A 705 to “1” and issues an interrupt request to the CPU 56 on the assumption that an error has occurred during communication.

  FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the status register B706. The status register B 706 is a register for confirming the reception state (reception status) of the serial communication circuit 505. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 can confirm the reception status of the serial communication circuit 505 by confirming the value of the bit of the status register B 706. As shown in FIG. 27B, the status register B706 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. Further, the status register B 706 is configured so that bit 0 can only be read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write a value to bit 0 of status register A 705, it is invalid. Status register B 706 is configured such that bits 1 to 7 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if a control for writing a value to bits 1 to 7 of the status register A 705 is performed, the value is invalid and all the values read from the bits 1 to 7 are “0 (= 0000b)”.

  FIG. 27B is a diagram showing an example of status confirmation data stored in the status register B706. As shown in FIG. 27B, a reception active flag indicating that the reception circuit is receiving reception data (reception active) is stored in bit 0 (bit name “RAF”) of the status register B706. . As shown in FIG. 27B, when “0” is stored in bit 0, it indicates that the reception circuit is not receiving reception data. Further, when “1” is stored in bit 0, it indicates that the reception circuit is receiving reception data. When the serial communication circuit 505 detects the start bit, it assumes that reception of received data has started, and sets bit 0 of the status register B 706 to “1”.

  FIG. 28A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the control register C709. The control register C709 is a register for setting whether to permit an interrupt request when a communication error occurs in the serial communication circuit 505. In this embodiment, by setting the value of each bit of the control register C709, it is set whether to permit or prohibit an interrupt request during communication from the serial communication circuit 505. In the control register C709, error interrupt request setting data indicating whether or not various interrupt requests at the time of a communication error are permitted is mainly set. In addition to the error interrupt request setting data, the control register C709 stores 9th bit data when the data length is set to 9 bits. Various settings of the serial communication circuit 505 are also set. As shown in FIG. 28A, the control register C709 is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. Control register C709 is configured such that bits 0 to 3 and bits 6 and 7 can be written and read. Further, the control register C709 is configured such that bits 4 and 5 cannot be written or read. Therefore, even if control is performed to write a value to bits 4 and 5 of the control register C709, it is invalid, and all values read from bits 4 and 5 are “0 (= 0000b)”.

  FIG. 28B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of error interrupt request setting data set in the control register C709. As shown in FIG. 28B, bit 7 (bit name “R8”) of the control register C709 stores the 9th bit data of the received data when the data length is set to 9 bits. Further, bit 6 (bit name “T8”) of the control register C709 stores the ninth bit of transmission data when the data length is set to nine bits.

  In bit 3 (bit name “ORIE”) of the control register C709, setting data indicating whether or not to permit an overrun flag interrupt request, which is an interrupt request to be performed when an overrun is detected, is set. As shown in FIG. 28B, by setting bit 3 to “0”, the overrun flag interrupt request is set to be prohibited. Further, by setting bit 3 to “1”, the overrun flag interrupt request is set to be permitted.

  Bit 2 (bit name “NEIE”) of the control register C709 is set with setting data indicating whether or not to permit a noise error flag interrupt request, which is an interrupt request to be performed when a noise error is detected. As shown in FIG. 28B, by setting bit 2 to “0”, the noise error flag interrupt request is set to be prohibited. Also, by setting bit 2 to “1”, the noise error flag interrupt request is set to be permitted.

  Bit 1 (bit name “FEIE”) of the control register C709 is set with setting data indicating whether or not to permit a framing error flag interrupt request, which is an interrupt request to be performed when a framing error is detected. As shown in FIG. 28B, by setting bit 1 to “0”, the framing error flag interrupt request is set to be prohibited. Further, by setting bit 1 to “1”, the framing error flag interrupt request is set to be permitted.

  Bit 0 (bit name “PEIE”) of the control register C709 is set with setting data indicating whether or not to permit a parity error flag interrupt request which is an interrupt request to be performed when a parity error is detected. As shown in FIG. 28B, by setting bit 0 to “0”, the parity error flag interrupt request is set to be prohibited. Further, by setting bit 0 to “1”, the parity error flag interrupt request is set to be permitted.

  FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a data register included in the serial communication circuit 505. The data register 701 is a register that stores data transmitted and received by the serial communication circuit 505. As shown in FIG. 29, the data register is an 8-bit register, and the initial value is set to “0 (= 00h)”. Data register 701 is configured such that bits 0 to 7 can be written and read.

  In this embodiment, when the serial communication circuit 505 transmits transmission data, the data register is used as the transmission data register 710. When the data length is set to 9 bits, bit 6 of the data register and control register C709 is used as the transmission data register 710. In this case, bits 0 to 7 of the data register are used as bits 0 to 7 of the transmission data register 710, and bit 6 of the control register C709 is used as bit 8 of the transmission data register 710.

  When the serial communication circuit 505 receives received data, the data register is used as the received data register 711. When the data length is set to 9 bits, bit 7 of the data register and control register C709 is used as the reception data register 711. In this case, bits 0 to 7 of the data register are used as bits 0 to 7 of the reception data register 711, and bit 7 of the control register C709 is used as bit 8 of the reception data register 711.

  The interrupt control circuit 714 makes various interrupt requests to the CPU 56. In this embodiment, when the bit 6 (TCIE) of the control register B 708 is set to “1”, the interrupt control circuit 714 notifies the CPU 56 when transmission of transmission data to the transmission data register 710 is completed. In addition to outputting an interrupt signal, an interrupt request is made by setting bit 6 (TC) of status register A705 to “1”. The interrupt control circuit 714 may output a different interrupt signal to the CPU 56 for each interrupt factor, instead of making the interrupt factor identifiable by the set value of the bit of the status register A705.

  In addition, when the bit 5 (RIE) of the control register B 708 is set to “1”, the interrupt control circuit 714 enters a state where the reception data is stored in the reception data register 711 (when reception data full is detected). ), An interrupt signal is output to the CPU 56, and an interrupt request is made by setting bit 5 (RDRF) of the status register A705 to “1”.

  Further, when any of the bits 0 to 3 of the control register C709 is set to “1”, the interrupt control circuit 714 outputs an interrupt signal to the CPU 56 and also indicates the type of communication error. In response to this, an interrupt request is made by setting "1" to bits 0 to 3 of the status register A705. For example, if bit 3 (ORIE) of the control register C709 is set to “1”, “1” is set to bit 3 (OR) of the status register A705 when an overrun is detected and an interrupt request is made. To do. For example, when bit 2 (NEIE) of the control register C709 is set to “1”, when a noise error is detected and an interrupt request is made, “1” is set to bit 2 (NF) of the status register A705. Set. For example, when bit 1 (FEIE) of the control register C709 is set to “1”, when a framing error is detected and an interrupt request is made, “1” is set to bit 1 (FE) of the status register A705. Set. For example, when bit 0 (PEIE) of the control register C709 is set to “1”, when a parity error is detected and an interrupt request is made, “1” is set to bit 0 (PF) of the status register A705. Set. When a plurality of communication errors are detected, the interrupt control circuit 714 makes an interrupt request based on the plurality of communication errors and sets the corresponding bits of the status register A 705 to “1”.

  The transmission format / parity generation circuit 715 generates a data format of transmission data. In this embodiment, the transmission format / parity generation circuit 715 generates a data format by adding a start bit and a stop bit to the transmission data stored in the transmission data register 710 and transfers the data format to the transmission shift register 712. When bit 1 (PE) of the control register A707 is set to “1” and the parity function is set to be used, the transmission format / parity generation circuit 715 adds a parity bit to the transmission data. Generate a data format.

  The reception format / parity check circuit 716 detects the data format of the reception data. In this embodiment, the reception format / parity check circuit 716 detects the start bit and the stop bit from the reception data stored in the reception shift register 713, detects the data portion included in the reception data, and receives the reception data register. Forward to 711. When bit 1 (PE) of the control register A707 is set to “1” and the parity function is set to be used, the reception format / parity check circuit 716 obtains the parity of the reception data and receives the reception data. It is detected whether or not it matches the parity included in. If the obtained value does not match the parity included in the received data, the reception format / parity check circuit 716 detects a parity error. If it is set in the serial communication circuit setting process to be described later that an interrupt request at the time of a communication error is permitted, the interrupt control circuit 714, when detecting a parity error, requests the CPU 56 to interrupt the occurrence of the communication error as a cause of interruption. I do.

  FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an address map of a storage area in the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 30, the area from address 0000h to address 1FFFh in the storage area of the game control microcomputer 560 is allocated to the ROM 54. An area from addresses 7E00h to 7FFFh is allocated to the RAM 55. Further, the area from the address FD00h to the address FE00h is allocated to a built-in register such as the random number maximum value setting register 535.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the area from address 0000h to 1FFFh allocated to the ROM 54 includes a user program area and a user program management area. A program (user program) 550 created in advance by a user (for example, a game machine manufacturer) is stored in the user program area in the area of addresses 0000h to 1F7Fh. Further, data (user program execution data) necessary for the CPU 56 to execute the user program 550 is stored in the user program management area in the area of addresses 1F80h to 1FFFh. Of the areas 7E00h to 7FFFh allocated to the RAM 55, the areas 7E00h to 7EFFh are unused areas, and the areas 7F00h to 7FFFh are used as work areas.

  FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an address map in the user program management area. As shown in FIG. 31, the initial value changing method selected by the user among the initial value changing methods which are methods for changing the initial value input to the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 is provided in the area of address 1F97h. The initial value change method setting data for designating is stored. Further, in the areas 1F98h and 1F99h, RAM address data for specifying an address in the RAM 55 (designated RAM address) designated in advance by the user among addresses 7F00h to 7FFFh allocated to the RAM 55 is stored. The In this case, of the values indicating the designated RAM address, the lower value of the designated RAM address is stored in the 1F98h address, and the higher value of the designated RAM address is stored in the 1F99h address.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram of an example of initial value change method setting data. As shown in FIG. 32, the initial value change data is composed of 8-bit data. The initial value change data “00h” is data specifying that the initial value is not changed as the initial value change method. In this embodiment, when the initial value change data “00h” is set, the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 updates the count value from a predetermined initial value “0” to a predetermined final value. Become. Further, the initial value change data “01h” is data specifying that the initial value input to the counter 521 is changed to a value based on an ID number for identifying the game control microcomputer 560 as an initial value change method. It is. In this embodiment, when the initial value change data “01h” is set, the initial value of the counter value updated by the counter 521 is changed from “0” to a value based on the ID number. The count value is updated from the initial value to a predetermined final value.

  The user program 550 stored in the user program area will be described. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the user program 550. As shown in FIG. 33, in this embodiment, the user program 550 includes a random number circuit setting program 551 composed of a plurality of types of program modules, a display result determination program 552, a count value permutation change program 554, A numerical value update program 555, a serial communication circuit setting program 556, and an interrupt priority setting program 557 are included.

  The random number circuit setting program 551 is a program for executing a random number circuit setting process for performing initial setting for causing the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R. That is, the CPU 56 functions as random number circuit initial setting means by executing processing according to the random number circuit setting program 551.

  FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the random number circuit setting program 551. As shown in FIG. 34, the random number circuit setting program 551 includes, as a plurality of types of program modules, a random number maximum value setting module 551a, a random number update method selection module 551b, a cycle setting module 551c, a random number circuit activation module 551d, An initial value changing module 551e and a random number circuit selecting module 551f are included.

  The random number maximum value setting module 551a is a program module for causing the random number circuit 503 to set the maximum value of the random R preset by the user (for example, the manufacturer of the gaming machine). The CPU 56 executes processing according to the random number maximum value setting module 551a, thereby writing random number maximum value setting data for specifying the maximum value of the random R preset by the user in the random number maximum value setting register 535. By doing so, the CPU 56 sets the maximum value of the random R preset by the user in the random number circuit 503. For example, when “255” is set in advance as the maximum value of the random R by the user, the CPU 56 writes the random number maximum value setting data “00FFh” in the random number maximum value setting register 535 and the random R maximum value “255”. Is set in the random number circuit 503.

  The random number update method selection module 551b is a program module for causing the random number circuit 503 to set the random number update method (first random number update method or second random number update method) selected by the user. The CPU 56 writes the random number update method selection data “01b” or “10b” designating the random number update method selected by the user in the random number update method selection register 540 by executing the process according to the random number update method selection module 551b. By doing so, the CPU 56 sets the random number update method selected by the user in the random number circuit 503. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of selecting either the first random number update method or the second random number update method as the random number update method used by the random number circuit 503 for the random number update.

  The cycle setting module 551c is a program for causing the random number circuit 503 to set the cycle of the internal clock signal preset by the user (that is, the cycle in which the clock signal output circuit 524 outputs the clock signal to the selector 528 and the inverting circuit 532). It is a module. The CPU 56 writes processing in the cycle setting register 537 for designating the cycle of the internal clock signal preset by the user by executing processing in accordance with the cycle setting module 551c. By doing so, the CPU 56 sets the cycle of the internal clock signal preset by the user in the random number circuit 503. For example, when the cycle of the internal clock signal is set in advance as “system clock signal cycle × 128 × 16” by the user, the CPU 56 writes the cycle setting data “0Fh” in the cycle setting register 537 and sets the internal clock signal The period “system clock signal period × 128 × 16” is set in the random number circuit 503.

  The random number circuit activation module 551d is a program module for activating the random number circuit 503. The CPU 56 activates the random number circuit 503 by writing the random number circuit activation data “80h” into the random number circuit activation register 541 by executing processing according to the random number circuit activation module 551d.

  The initial value change module 551e is a program module for changing the initial value of the count value updated by the counter 521. The CPU 56 functions as an initial value changing unit by executing processing according to the initial value changing module 551e. The CPU 56 executes the initial value changing module 551e to change the initial value of the count value updated by the counter 521 by the initial value changing method selected by the user. By doing so, the CPU 56 has a function of selecting an initial value changing method.

  In this embodiment, when initial value change method setting data “01h” is stored in the area of address 1F97h in the user program management area, the CPU 56 sets the initial value of the count value for each game control microcomputer 560. The value is changed to a value calculated based on the assigned unique ID number.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 associates, in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54, the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 with a calculated value obtained by performing a predetermined calculation based on the ID number. I remember it. In this case, for example, if the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 is “100”, the calculated value “150” obtained by adding the predetermined value “50” to the ID number “100” is set in advance as the ID number. Are stored in association with each other. Further, for example, the calculated value “50” obtained by subtracting the predetermined value “50” from the ID number “100” is stored in advance in association with the ID number. Further, for example, only a predetermined value may be stored in advance in association with the ID number. Then, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 adds a value “150” obtained by adding an ID number (for example, “100”) to a predetermined value (for example, “50”) stored in advance, and sets the initial count value. The CPU 56 may also use a value “50” obtained by subtracting a predetermined value (eg, “50”) stored in advance from the ID number (eg, “100”) as an initial value of the count value. The game control microcomputer 560 may store the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54 as long as data writing is prohibited in the storage area. Alternatively, it may be stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 55.

  When the initial value change method setting data “01h” is stored, the CPU 56 changes the initial value of the count value to the calculated value based on the ID number stored in advance. By doing so, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved, and the initial value of the random number can be made difficult to recognize simply by looking at the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560. . Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the transition condition to the big hit state from being illegally established by an action such as generating a captured signal using a radio signal to the gaming machine, and improving security. Can be improved.

  For example, when initial value change method setting data “01h” is stored, the CPU 56 calculates the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 and a predetermined value (for example, adds a predetermined value to the ID number). The initial value of the count value is changed to the calculated value obtained. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 may calculate a value that is randomly changed using a random number as an ID number, thereby randomly updating a value used for the calculation and obtaining an initial value. By doing so, the randomness of the random numbers generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  The random number circuit selection module 551f is a program module for setting a random number circuit to be used when executing a timer interrupt process including a game control process from among the random number circuits 503 built in the game control microcomputer 560. The CPU 56 executes a process according to the random number circuit selection module 551f, so that any of the two random number circuits (12-bit random number circuit 503a and 16-bit random number circuit 503b) built in the game control microcomputer 560 is selected. Set whether to use when executing timer interrupt processing. For example, the CPU 56 uses a 12-bit random number circuit 503a or 16-bit as a random number circuit used when executing the timer interrupt process according to a predetermined set value (a value set in advance by the user) stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54. The random number circuit 503b is set.

  Note that both the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b may be set as random number circuits used when the timer interrupt process is executed. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 may determine the variation pattern based on the random number generated by the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and perform the jackpot determination based on the random number generated by the 16-bit random number circuit 503b. In this embodiment, the random value storage circuit 531 exists in each of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b (that is, a random-value storage circuit that stores a random number for 12 bits and a 16-bit random-number storage circuit). A random value storage circuit for storing random numbers exists separately). When both the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are set, the CPU 56 is provided in the RAM 55 with the random number read from the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the random number read from the 16-bit random number circuit 503b. Stored in separate buffer areas. Therefore, even when the timing for reading a random number from the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the timing for reading a random number from the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are the same, two different random numbers can be extracted and stored in different buffer areas.

  The random value update program 555 is a program for updating the value of the random R stored in the random value storage circuit 531 when the first random number update method is selected as the random number update method. The CPU 56 functions as a random value updating unit by executing processing according to the random value updating program 555. When the first random number update method is selected, the CPU 56 executes the random number value update program 555 and writes the count value update data “01h” in the count value update register 538, whereby the count value is stored in the counter 521. And the value of the random R stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is updated. When the second random number update method is selected as the random number update method, the counter 521 is updated with the random number generation clock signal output from the clock signal output circuit 537, and the random value storage circuit 531 is updated. The value of random R stored in is updated.

  The display result determination program 552 is a program for determining whether or not the display result in the special symbol display device 8 is a jackpot symbol. The CPU 56 functions as a display result determination unit by executing processing according to the display result determination program 552.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 follows the display result determination program 552 in response to the fact that the game ball has won the variable winning ball device 15 and the condition (execution condition) for executing the variable symbol special display is established. Execute the process. Then, the CPU 56 reads the updated random R value from the random value storage circuit 531, and determines whether or not the display result in the special symbol display device 8 is a jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation in which the CPU 56 updates the random R value or reads the random R value when the first random number update method is selected. As shown in FIG. 35, when the first random number update method is selected, the CPU 56 writes the count value update data “01h” to the count value update register 538, thereby storing the random number value storage circuit 531. The value of R (for example, “2”) is updated. Then, the CPU 56 receives a random R value from the random value storage circuit 531 in response to the fact that the game ball has won the variable winning ball device 15 and the condition (execution condition) for executing the variable symbol special display is established. (For example, “2”) is read out.

  When the random R value stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is further updated, an interval equal to or longer than the period of the system clock signal output from the clock circuit 501 has elapsed since the random R value was updated at the previous update. Sometimes, the count value update data “01h” must be written to the count value update register 538. This is because it is necessary to secure time for reading the updated random R value from the random value storage circuit 531.

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation in which the CPU 56 reads the value of the random R when the second random number update method is selected. As shown in FIG. 36, when the second random number update method is selected, the timer circuit 534 writes the random value fetch data “01h” into the random value fetch register 539, and the counter 521 outputs it. The count value (for example, “2”) is taken into the random value storage circuit 531 to update the random R value stored in the random value storage circuit 531. Then, the CPU 56 reads the updated random R value (for example, “2”) from the random value storage circuit 531.

  Specifically, when the second random number update method is selected, the counter 521 updates the count value C using the input of the random number generation clock signal SI1 as a trigger. Thereafter, when the random value fetch data “01h” is written into the random value fetch register 539, the latch signal generation circuit 533 outputs the latch signal SL to the random value storage circuit 531. Then, the random value storage circuit 531 reads and stores the count value output from the counter 521 with the input of the latch signal SL as a trigger. Then, the CPU 56 reads the value of random R stored in the random value storage circuit 531.

  If the timer circuit 534 does not write the random value fetch data “01h” into the random value fetch register 539, even if the counter 521 updates the count value, the random value storage circuit 531 will not update the counter 521. Do not memorize numerical values. For example, the timer circuit 534 writes the random value take-in data “01h” into the random value take-in register 539, the count value “3” output from the counter 521 is taken into the random value storage circuit 531, and the random value storage circuit 531 , The random R value “3” stored therein is updated. In this case, the count value output from the counter 521 is updated from “3” to “4” or “5” unless the timer circuit 534 writes the random number value acquisition data “01h” into the random number acquisition register 539 again. However, the random value stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is not updated, and the random value read from the random value storage circuit 531 remains “3”.

  The count value permutation change program 554 writes count value permutation change data “01h” to the count value permutation change register 536, and executes count value permutation change processing for changing the permutation of count values stored in the random value storage circuit 531. It is a program for. The CPU 56 functions as numerical data permutation changing means by executing processing according to the count value permutation changing program 554. The CPU 56 executes the count value permutation change program 554 and writes the count value permutation change data “01h” in the count value permutation change register 536, whereby the count value permutation change circuit 523 outputs and inputs to the random value storage circuit 531. The permutation of the count values to be changed is changed.

  The serial communication circuit setting program 556 executes a serial communication circuit setting process for performing an initial setting for serial communication with a microcomputer (in this example, a payout control microcomputer) mounted on each control board in the serial communication circuit 505. It is a program to make it. That is, the CPU 56 functions as serial communication circuit setting means by executing processing according to the serial communication circuit setting program 556.

  The interrupt priority setting program 557 is a program for initially setting the priority of interrupt processing executed in response to an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505. That is, the CPU 56 functions as priority order initial setting means by executing processing according to the interrupt priority order setting program 556.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 37, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a special figure holding memory 570, a big hit determination table memory 571, a flag memory 572, and a start winning port switch timer memory 573.

  In the special figure holding memory 570, the game ball wins the variable winning ball device 15 and the execution condition of the variable symbol variable display is satisfied, but the variable display start condition is not yet satisfied (for example, the special symbol display device). 8 is a memory (storage area) for storing pending data including the number of times the execution condition for variable display is satisfied (8 is still executing variable display). The special figure holding memory 570 includes four entries. Each entry includes a holding number and a random R read from the random number storage circuit 531 according to the winning order in the order in which the game balls win the variable winning ball device 15. A value is stored in association with each other. In addition, each time the special symbol variable display in the special symbol display device 8 is finished once or the big hit gaming state is finished, the variable display start condition based on the top information of the special symbol holding memory 570 is set. It is established, and variable display based on the top information of the special figure holding memory 570 is executed. In this case, when the condition for starting the variable display of special symbols is satisfied, the information registered in the second or lower place in the special figure holding memory 570 is moved up by one place. In addition, when a game ball newly wins the variable winning ball apparatus 15 during the variable display of the special symbol, the value of the random R read from the random value storage circuit 531 based on the new winning is the special R value. It is registered in the empty entry in the figure holding memory 570.

  The jackpot determination table memory 571 stores a plurality of jackpot determination tables used by the CPU 56 to determine whether or not the display result of the special symbol display device 8 is a jackpot symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38A, the big hit determination table memory 571 stores a normal time big hit determination table 571a used in a gaming state (referred to as a normal state) other than the probability variation state. Further, the jackpot determination table memory 571 stores a probability change jackpot determination table 571b used in the probability change state, as shown in FIG. Note that, when the big hit determination is performed using the determination table shown in FIG. In this case, for example, if the set random number maximum value is too small, the difference in the probability of determining a big hit between the case where the normal big hit determination table 571a is used and the case where the probability variation big hit determination table 571b is used is small. As a result, the player's interest in the game is diminished. Therefore, a plurality of determination tables (a plurality of normal big hit determination tables 571a and a plurality of probability variation big hit determination tables 571b) are stored in the big hit determination table memory 571 in association with the random number circuit 503 and the random number maximum value. Also good. Then, the CPU 56 uses the random number circuit 503 to be used and the determination tables 571a and 571b corresponding to the maximum random number among the determination tables stored in the big hit determination table memory 571, and displays the special symbol according to the display result determination program 552. You may make it determine whether the display result of the apparatus 8 is made a big hit symbol. By doing so, even if the type of random number circuit 503 to be used and the maximum random number value are different, it is possible to control so that the probability of determining a big hit is somewhat the same.

  In this embodiment, a 16-bit random number circuit 503b is used. That is, it is assumed that it is decided to use the 16-bit random number circuit 503b in the process of step S151. Therefore, a value in a range (range from 0 to 65535) that can be generated in 16 bits can be taken as random R.

  In the flag memory 572, various flags used in the game control process for controlling the progress of the game are set. For example, in the flag memory 572, a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is a probability change state and a big hit flag indicating that the game state is a big hit state are set.

  The start port switch timer memory 573 stores a timer value that is added or cleared in accordance with the winning detection signal SS input from the start port switch 14a.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. 39 and 40 show main processing executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 in response to the start of power supply to the game machine and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 560 becoming high level. It is a flowchart which shows. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes a high level, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid. The main processing after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, an interrupt mode for maskable interrupts is set (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set for the stack pointer (step S3). In step S2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is Set to the mode indicating the interrupt address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Next, the built-in device register is set (initialized) (step S4). By the processing in step S4, the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) are set (initialized).

  The game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) 504.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the power-off signal is in an OFF state depending on the state of bit 0 of the input port 1 (step S5). When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the output voltage of various power sources such as the + 5V power source gradually reaches a specified value, but the power-off signal is not output by the process of step S5, that is, the high-power signal is not output. By confirming that the power supply voltage is stable, the CPU 56 can confirm that the power supply voltage is stable.

  When the power-off signal is in the on state, the CPU 56 confirms again whether the power-off signal is in the off state after a delay time of a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) (step S80). To do. If the power-off signal is off, the RAM 55 is set to an accessible state (step S6), and the process proceeds to a clear signal check process.

  When the power-off signal is in the off state, software delay processing for delaying the start timing of the gaming device control processing (game control processing) for controlling the progress of the game by software may be executed. By such software delay processing, the start timing of the game control processing can be delayed as compared with the case where the software delay processing is not executed. When the delay process is executed, a situation occurs in which the microcomputer of the other control board cannot receive the command transmitted from the game control board (main board 31) to the other control board (for example, the payout control board 37). Can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the clear switch is turned on (step S7). Note that the CPU 56 may confirm the state of the clear signal only once via the input port 0, but may confirm the state of the clear signal a plurality of times. For example, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is an off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds), the state of the clear signal is reconfirmed. If it is confirmed that the clear signal is in the on state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the on state. Further, at this time, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is the off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time, the state of the clear signal may be confirmed again. Here, the number of reconfirmations is not limited to once or twice, but may be three or more times. It is also possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  If the clear switch is not turned on in step S7, whether or not data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped Confirm (step S8). In this embodiment, when power supply is stopped, a process for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of power supply stop is stored. . When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process is not performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process.

  Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed is determined by the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process corresponding to the execution of the power supply stop process (for example, 2). ) Is confirmed by whether or not. Note that such a confirmation method is an example. For example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop process, and the flag is set in step S8. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop process has been performed.

  If it is determined that the control state at the time of stopping power supply is stored, the CPU 56 performs data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S9). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above processing is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 56 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area and uses the inverted data as the checksum.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by the same process as described above, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process (the process of steps S10 to S14) executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is stopped is stopped. Execute.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S91 and S92, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and proceeds to step S15.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Also, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  Control states such as a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, an award ball flag, an out-of-ball flag, etc. An initial value is set in a flag for selectively performing processing according to the above. In addition, a bit corresponding to the output port that outputs the connection confirmation signal in the output port buffer is set (corresponding to the ON state of the connection confirmation signal).

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the head address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board. Processing is executed (step S14). As an initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the variable display device 9, an initialization command to the payout control board 37, or the like can be used.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuits 503a and 503b (step S15). In this case, the CPU 56 performs settings in accordance with the random number circuit setting program 551 to make the random number circuits 503a and 503b update the random R value.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a serial communication circuit setting process for initial setting of the serial communication circuit 505 (step S15a). In this case, the CPU 56 performs processing according to the serial communication circuit setting program 556, thereby setting the serial communication circuit 505 to perform serial communication with the payout control microcomputer.

  When the serial communication circuit 505 is initialized, the CPU 56 initializes the priority of interrupt processing executed in response to the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 (step S15b). In this case, the CPU 56 initializes the priority of interrupt processing by executing processing according to the interrupt priority setting program 557.

  For example, the CPU 56 initializes the priority of each interrupt process according to a predetermined interrupt process priority table including the default priority of each interrupt process. FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram of an example of an interrupt processing priority table. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 is initially configured to preferentially execute an interrupt process whose cause is a communication error in the serial communication circuit 505 in accordance with the interrupt process priority table shown in FIG. Set. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 sets an interrupt priority execution flag at the time of communication error indicating that priority is given to an interrupt process whose cause is an interrupt.

  In this embodiment, when a timer interrupt and an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 are generated at the same time, the CPU 56 preferentially performs an interrupt process by the timer interrupt.

  In addition, the default priority of each interrupt process can be changed by the user. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 stores specification information for specifying an interrupt process set by a user (for example, a game machine manufacturer) in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54 in advance. Then, the CPU 56 sets the priority of interrupt processing according to the designation information stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54.

  Then, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) ( Step S16). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the timer interrupt setting is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S18) and the initial value random number update process (step S18a). The CPU 56 disables the interrupt when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed (step S17), and interrupts when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished. The permission state is set (step S19).

  When the interrupt-permitted state is set in step S19, the timer interrupt or interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 is permitted until the next processing in step S17 is executed and the interrupt-prohibited state is set. . If a timer interrupt occurs while the interrupt permission state is set, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes a timer interrupt process to be described later. In addition, when an interrupt request is generated from the serial communication circuit 505 while the interrupt permission state is set, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 causes each interrupt process (communication error interrupt process and reception) to be described later. Execute time interruption processing and transmission completion interruption processing). In this embodiment, priority is given to the interrupt process before the timer interrupt or the interrupt request is set to be permitted by executing step S15b before the loop process from step S17 to step S19. Processing for setting or changing the order is performed.

  The display random number is a random number for determining the display of the special symbol display 8. In this embodiment, as a display random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol, or a random number for determining a reach for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not generated, is used. Used. The display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number.

  The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The random number for initial value is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (for example, a jackpot symbol determining random number for determining a special symbol that generates a jackpot, or any game state (probability state or high A counter (determination random number for determination) for generating a state determination random number for determining whether to shift to (base state), a normal determination random number for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol This is a random number for determining an initial value of a count value such as an occurrence counter). A game control process described later (a process in which a game control microcomputer controls itself a game device such as a variable display device 9, a variable winning ball device 15, a ball payout device 97 provided in the game machine, or When the count value of the determination random number generation counter makes one round in a process of transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a gaming apparatus control process), an initial value is set in the counter.

  Note that when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt disabled state is set even when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are performed by the timer interrupt process described later. This is because it is executed (that is, the same process is also executed in steps S24 and S25 of the timer interrupt process), so that it does not conflict with the process in the timer interrupt process. That is, if a timer interrupt is generated during the processing of steps S18 and S18a and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number and the initial value random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, The continuity of values may be impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt is prohibited during the processing of steps S18 and S18a.

  As described above, a game clerk or the like can easily perform initial initialization by starting the power supply to the gaming machine (for example, turning on the power switch 914) while the clear switch 921 is turned on and the clear signal is output. Can be executed. That is, RAM clear or the like can be performed.

  Next, the random number circuit setting process (step S15) in the main process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the random number circuit setting process. In the random number circuit setting process, the CPU 56 first executes the process according to the random number circuit selection module 551f included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and from among the random number circuits 503a and 503b built in the game control microcomputer 560, the game A random number circuit to be used when executing the timer interrupt process including the control process is set (step S151). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 stores, in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54, designation information for designating the random number circuit 503 used when executing a timer interrupt process set by a user (for example, a game machine manufacturer). I remember it. Then, the CPU 56 selects either the 12-bit random number circuit 503a or the 16-bit random number circuit 503b according to the designation information stored in the predetermined storage area of the ROM 54, and uses the selected random number circuit when executing the timer interrupt process. Set as a random number circuit. Note that both the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b may be set as random number circuits used when the timer interrupt process is executed.

  As described above, in step S151, whether or not each of a plurality of random number circuits (12-bit random number circuit 503a and 16-bit random number circuit 503b) having different predetermined ranges of numerical data that can be updated can be used is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unnecessary random numbers from being processed during the execution of the timer interrupt process, and the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced. For example, when the game control microcomputer 560 performs the game control process using only the random number generated by one of the two random number circuits 503a and 503b, the random number is read from the random number circuit not used for the game control process. Processing or the like can be prevented, and the control burden of the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  When the CPU 56 sets the random number circuit 503 to be used in step S151, the CPU 56 stops the operation of the counter 521 and the clock signal output circuit 524, for example, by not writing data to the random number circuit activation register 541 so that the random number circuit 503 is not used. The counter 521 of the set random number circuit is prevented from updating the count value C. Further, for example, the counter 521 of the random number circuit that is set not to use updates the count value C, but the CPU 56 does not output the output control signal SC so that the random number cannot be read from the random value storage circuit 531. You may control to. Further, for example, the CPU 56 prevents the random number value fetching data “01h” from being written in the random number fetching register 539 of the random number circuit that is set not to be used for the timer circuit 534, and the latch signal generation circuit 533 Control may be performed so that the latch signal SL is not output to the random value storage circuit 531.

  As described above, by setting the random number circuit 503 to be used, by setting only the random number circuit 503 to be used, the range of the random number value to be generated can be appropriately set. Further, it is possible to prevent unnecessary random numbers from being processed during the execution of the timer interrupt process, and the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced. For example, when the big hit determination is performed using a determination table including a distant value (for example, “1” and “100”) as the big hit determination value, the big hit is determined with a predetermined big hit probability (for example, 1/100). In this case, the number of types of determination values to be processed is smaller when the random number by the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is used than when the random number by the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is used, and the game control microcomputer 560 is used. The control burden is reduced.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes processing in accordance with the random number maximum value setting module 551a included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and generates random number maximum value setting data for designating a random number maximum value preset by the user as a random number maximum value setting register 535. (Step S152). By doing so, the random number maximum value of random R preset by the user is set in the random number circuit 503. When the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set as the random number circuit used when the timer interrupt is executed, the CPU 56 sets the random number maximum value that specifies the random number maximum value (any value from “0” to “4095”). Data is written into the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is set as the random number circuit used when the timer interrupt is executed, the CPU 56 sets the random number maximum value that specifies the maximum random number value (any value from “0” to “65535”). Data is written into the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 16-bit random number circuit 503b.

  In this embodiment, when “0” to “255” are set as the random number maximum value, the random number maximum value is reset to a predetermined value in the random number maximum value resetting process described later. Even when control is performed to write a value greater than “256” as the random number maximum value, values “0” to “255” are set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 due to data corruption or the like. In the case where it is lost, the random number maximum value is reset to a predetermined value in the random number maximum value resetting process described later.

  As described above, since the maximum value of the random number to be generated is set in advance in the random number maximum value setting register 535 in step S152, a random number having a value larger than the range of random numbers used during execution of the timer interrupt process is generated. Can be prevented, and the processing load of the random number circuit 503 and the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  Further, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 in step S152 is not less than a predetermined lower limit value. A random number maximum value resetting process for resetting the random number maximum value set in 535 is executed (step S153).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a process according to the initial value change module 551e included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and executes an initial value change process for changing the initial value of the count value updated by the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 (step). S154).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes processing in accordance with the random number update method selection module 551b included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and writes the random number update method selection data in the random number update method selection register 540 (step S155). By doing so, the random number update method of the random number circuit 503 is set. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 writes the random number update method selection data “10h” in the random number update method selection register 540. That is, in this embodiment, the second random number update method is set as the random number update method of the random number circuit 503.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes processing according to the cycle setting module 551c included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and sets the cycle setting data (the reference clock signal by how many minutes) that specifies the cycle of the random number generation clock signal SI1 preset by the user. The data for setting whether to circulate) is written in the period setting register 537 (step S156). By doing so, the cycle of the random number generating clock signal SI1 preset by the user is set in the random number circuit 503.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets whether or not to update the initial value input to the counter 521 when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value by the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 (step S157). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 sets in advance a setting value indicating whether or not to update the initial value input to the counter 521 when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value by the counter 521. And stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 54. Whether or not the CPU 56 updates the initial value input to the counter 521 when the counter 521 updates the count value to a predetermined final value in accordance with a predetermined set value stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54. Set In this embodiment, when the CPU 56 determines to update the initial value input to the counter 521 in step S157, the count value is updated to a predetermined final value (when a notification signal is input from the counter 521). An initial value update flag indicating that the initial value is updated is set. In this embodiment, a case will be described in which an initial value update flag is set according to a predetermined set value in step S157. Then, the CPU 56 updates the initial value of the count value output from the counter 521 based on the initial value update flag being set in the random number circuit initial value update process described later.

  Instead of changing the initial value of the count value by the CPU 56, the initial value of the count value may be changed to a predetermined value on the random number circuit 503 side based on the update of the count value to the final value. For example, the random number circuit 503 includes an initial value update data register that stores initial value update data indicating that the initial value is updated, and an initial value change circuit that changes the initial value. Value update data is set in the initial value update data register. In this case, when the counter 521 updates the count value to the final value, it outputs a notification signal to the initial value change circuit. Then, the initial value change circuit checks whether or not initial value update data is set in the initial value update data register. Then, when the initial value change circuit confirms that the initial value update data is set, the initial value change circuit changes the initial value of the count value to a predetermined value. Note that the initial value changing circuit may change the initial value of the count value whose permutation has been changed in the count value permutation changing process described later.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets whether or not to change the permutation of the count values updated by the counter 521 when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value by the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 (step S158). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 sets in advance a set value indicating whether or not to change the permutation of the count values output by the counter 521 when the counter 521 updates the count value to a predetermined final value. Is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 54. Then, the CPU 56 changes the permutation of count values output by the counter 521 when the count value is updated by the counter 521 to a predetermined final value according to a predetermined set value stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54. Set whether or not. In this embodiment, if the CPU 56 determines in step S158 that the permutation of the count values output from the counter 521 is to be changed, the CPU 56 changes the permutation of the count values when the count values are updated to a predetermined final value. The indicated count value permutation change flag is set. In this embodiment, the case where the count value permutation change flag is set in step S158 according to a predetermined set value will be described. Then, the CPU 56 changes the permutation of the count values output by the counter 521 based on the fact that the count value permutation change flag is set in the count value permutation changing process described later.

  Instead of changing the permutation of the count values under the control of the CPU 56, the permutation of the count values may be changed on the random number circuit 503 side based on the update of the count values up to the final value. For example, the random number circuit 503 includes a permutation change data register that stores permutation change data indicating that the permutation of count values is to be changed. In step S158, the CPU 56 sets the permutation change data in the permutation change data register. In this case, when the counter 521 updates the count value to the final value, the notification signal is output to the count value permutation change circuit 523, and the count value permutation change circuit 523 that has received the notification signal receives the permutation change data in the permutation change data register. Check whether it is set. When the count value permutation changing circuit 523 confirms that the permutation change data is set, it changes the permutation of the count values.

  Then, the CPU 56 executes processing according to the random number circuit activation module 551d included in the random number circuit setting program 551, and writes the random number circuit activation data “80h” in the random number circuit activation register 541 (step S159). By doing so, the CPU 56 activates the random number circuit 503.

  Next, the random number maximum value resetting process (step S153) in the random number circuit setting process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the random number maximum value resetting process. In the random number maximum value resetting process, the CPU 56 reads the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 (step S153a). When the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set as the random number circuit used when the timer interrupt process is executed, the CPU 56 reads the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is set as the random number circuit used when the timer interrupt process is executed, the CPU 56 reads the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 16-bit random number circuit 503b.

  The CPU 56 determines whether or not the read random number maximum value is equal to or less than a predetermined lower limit value (step S153b). When the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set, the maximum random number value that can be set in the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is from “256” to “4095”. It is determined whether or not the maximum random number read from is lower limit value “256” or less. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is set, the maximum random number that can be set in the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is “512” to “65535”. It is determined whether or not the maximum random number read from the register 535 is equal to or lower than the lower limit “512”.

  When the read random number maximum value is less than or equal to the lower limit value, the CPU 56 resets the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 to a predetermined value (step S153c). When the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set, if the random number maximum value read from the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is determined to be less than or equal to the lower limit “256”, the CPU 56 determines the random number maximum value setting register 535. The random number maximum value set in is reset to a predetermined value “4095”. When the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is set, if the random number maximum value read from the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the 16-bit random number circuit 503b is determined to be less than or equal to the lower limit “512”, the CPU 56 sets the random number maximum value. The random number maximum value set in the register 535 is reset to a predetermined value “65535”.

  As described above, when the random number maximum value set in the random number maximum value setting register 535 is equal to or smaller than the predetermined lower limit value, the random number maximum value is reset to a predetermined value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively small value from being set as the maximum value of the random number due to a malfunction of the game control microcomputer 560 or an action such as generating a capture signal using a radio signal for the game machine. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a random number having an excessively small value range from the minimum value to the maximum value is generated.

  Next, the initial value changing process (step S154) in the random number circuit setting process will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the initial value changing process. In the initial value changing process, the CPU 56 first reads the initial value changing method setting data stored in the area 1F97h in the user program execution data area, and specifies the initial value changing method selected by the user. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the read initial value changing method setting data is “01h” (step S154a), thereby specifying the initial value changing method selected by the user.

  When the value of the initial value change method setting data is “01h”, the CPU 56 sets the initial value input to the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 to a value set based on the ID number unique to the game control microcomputer 560. Change (step S154b). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 associates, in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54, the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 with a calculated value obtained by performing a predetermined calculation based on the ID number. I remember it. In step S154b, the CPU 56 changes the initial value of the count value to the calculated value based on the ID number stored in advance. Further, for example, in step S154b, the CPU 56 calculates the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 and a predetermined value (for example, the ID number (for example, “100”) to a predetermined value (for example, “100”). The initial value of the count value is set to the calculated value (for example, “200”). When the initial value input to the counter 521 is changed, the CPU 56 sets an initial value change flag indicating that the initial value of the count value has been changed (step S154c).

  When the CPU 56 changes the initial value input to the counter 521 in step S154b, the CPU 56 checks the value of the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the comparator 522 of the random number circuit 503, and the value set based on the ID number is determined. It is determined whether or not it is greater than the maximum random number. If it is determined that the value set based on the ID number is equal to or greater than the maximum random number, the CPU 56 does not change the initial value input to the counter 521 (for example, resets the initial value to “0”). By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation where the initial value of the count value is set to a value equal to or greater than the maximum random number.

  If the value of the initial value change method setting data is not “01h” in step S154a (that is, the value of the initial value change method setting data stored in the area 1F97h of the user program execution data area is “00h”). In the case), the CPU 56 does not change the initial value of the count value, ends the initial value changing process as it is, and proceeds to step S155.

  By executing the random number circuit setting process, various signals are input to the random number circuit 503 when the timer interrupt process including the game control process is performed, and various signals are generated in the random number circuit 503. FIG. 45 is a timing chart showing the timing at which each signal is input to the random number circuit 503 and the timing at which each signal is generated in the random number circuit 503.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the clock circuit 501 increases the signal level of the output terminal from a low level to a high level at predetermined intervals (timing T11, T21,... Shown in FIG. 45). A reference clock signal CLK (see FIG. 45A) is input to 503.

  The clock signal output circuit 524 divides the reference clock signal CLK supplied from the clock circuit 501 to generate a random number generation clock signal SI1 (see FIG. 45B). For example, the clock signal output circuit 524 raises the signal level of the output terminal from the low level to the high level at timings T11, T12,..., And changes the signal level from the high level to the low level at timings T21, T22,. To output a random number generating clock signal SI1.

  In the example shown in FIG. 45, for ease of explanation, the clock signal output circuit 524 divides the reference clock signal CLK by two to generate the random number generation clock signal SI1. However, in the actual random number circuit, the period that can be set in the period setting register 537 is from “system clock signal period × 128 × 7” to “system clock signal period × 128 × 256”. Therefore, in an actual random number circuit, the clock signal output circuit 524 is set in the cycle setting register 537 in a range from “system clock signal cycle × 128 × 7” to “system clock signal cycle × 128 × 256”. The reference clock signal CLK is divided by a division ratio corresponding to the cycle setting data “07h” to “FFh” to generate a random number generating clock signal SI1. The random number generating clock signal SI 1 generated by the clock signal output circuit 524 is output to the selector 528 and the inverting circuit 532.

  In this embodiment, since the second random number update method is set in the random number circuit setting process, the second random number update method selection signal is input from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 to the selector 528. When the second random number update method selection signal output circuit 527 receives the second random number update method selection signal output circuit 527, the selector 528 selects the random number generation clock signal SI1 input from the clock signal output circuit 524 and outputs it to the counter 521. . Each time the rising edge of the random number generating clock signal SI1 supplied from the selector 528 is input, the counter 521 updates the count value C and outputs it to the count value permutation changing circuit 523.

  The inversion circuit 532 generates the inverted clock signal SI2 (see FIG. 45C) by inverting the signal level of the random number generation clock signal SI1 input from the clock signal output circuit 524. For example, the inverting circuit 532 lowers the signal level of the output terminal from the high level to the low level at timings T11, T12,..., And the signal level from the low level to the high level at timings T21, T22,. As a result, the inverted clock signal SI2 is output. Further, the inverted clock signal SI <b> 2 generated by the inverting circuit 532 is output to the latch signal generating circuit 533.

  When a predetermined time (for example, 3 milliseconds) elapses after the winning detection signal SS (see FIG. 45D) is input to the timer circuit 534, the latch signal generation circuit 533 receives a disturbance from the random value read signal output circuit 526. A numerical reading signal is input. For example, when the signal level of the output terminal of the random number read signal output circuit 526 rises from a low level to a high level, the random value read signal is input to the latch signal generation circuit 533. The latch signal generation circuit 533 inverts the random value read signal input from the random value read signal output circuit 526 in response to the input of the second random number update method selection signal from the random number update method selection signal output circuit 527. In synchronization with the rising edge of the inverted clock signal SI2 supplied from 532, the latch signal SL (see FIG. 45E) is output.

  As described above, the random number circuit 503 updates the count value C at the timings T11, T12, T13..., And outputs the latch signal SL at the timing T22 different from the timings T11, T12, T13. The random number value is stored in 531.

  Next, the serial communication circuit setting process (step S15a) in the main process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the serial communication circuit setting process. In the serial communication circuit setting process, the CPU 56 first executes the process according to the serial communication circuit setting program 556 to set the baud rate of the serial communication circuit 505 (step S1511). In this case, the CPU 56 writes a setting value corresponding to the baud rate to be set in the baud rate register 702 of the serial communication circuit 505. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 stores specification information for specifying a set value set by a user (for example, a game machine manufacturer) in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54 in advance. Then, the CPU 56 writes the setting value in the baud rate register 702 according to the designation information stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54. For example, when the baud rate set value “156” is set by the CPU 56, the baud rate “1201.92 bps” is generated by the baud rate generation circuit 703 using the equation (1) and the clock frequency “3 MHz”.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets a data format of data transmitted / received by the serial communication circuit 505 (step S1512). In this case, the CPU 56 sets the data length (8 bits or 9 bits) of the transmission / reception data and the use / nonuse of the parity function by setting the value of each bit of the control register A707. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 stores specification information for specifying the value of each bit of the control register A707 set by the user (for example, the manufacturer of the game machine) in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54 in advance. Yes. Then, the CPU 56 sets the value of each bit of the control register A707 according to the designation information stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54.

  In addition, the CPU 56 sets whether to permit each interrupt request generated by the serial communication circuit 505 (step S1513). In this case, the CPU 56 sets the value of bits 5, 6, and 7 of the control register B708 to thereby send an interrupt request at the time of transmission (a transmission interrupt request that is an interrupt request when transmitting data, or a transmission completion interrupt that is performed when transmission is completed). Request) and whether or not to accept interrupt request at reception. The CPU 56 can also be set to allow both a transmission interrupt request and a reception interrupt request, and allows only one of a transmission interrupt request and a reception interrupt request. It is also possible to set. Further, the CPU 56 sets whether or not to permit an interrupt request at the time of each communication error by setting the values of the bits 0 to 3 of the control register C709. For example, the gaming control microcomputer 560 stores, in advance, a predetermined storage area in the ROM 54 for specifying information for specifying the value of each bit of the control register B 708 and the control register C 709 set by the user (for example, the manufacturer of the gaming machine). I remember it. Then, the CPU 56 sets the value of each bit of the control register B 708 and the control register C 709 according to the designation information stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54.

  Next, the game control process will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main process, specifically, in a period during which interruption is permitted during execution of the loop process of steps S17 to S19, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 A game control process is executed in a timer interrupt process activated in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 56 first executes a power-off process (power-off detection process) for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether the power-on signal is turned on) (step S20). Subsequently, detection signals of switches such as the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the switch circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch) Process: Step S21). Specifically, if the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of each switch is ON, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether the initial value is set to be updated when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value in the random number circuit setting process (see step S157), and the counter of the random number circuit 503 is checked. Processing for updating the initial value input to 521 is performed (random circuit initial value updating processing: step S22).

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number used for game control is performed (step S23). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number (initial value random number update process: step S24). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (display random number update process: step S25).

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: For special symbol detachment symbol determination (2) Random 2: To determine a special symbol for generating a big hit (for big hit symbol determination).
(3) Random 3: Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4: Decide whether or not to reach when no big hit is generated (for reach determination)
(5) Random 5: Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(6) Random 6: Determine the initial value of random 2 (for determining the random 2 initial value)
(7) Random 7: Determine the initial value of random 5 (for determining the random 5 initial value)
(8) Random 8: Determine which state the game state is to be transferred to (for state determination). That is, the random 8 takes a value in the range of 0 to 19, and is used as a random number for determining whether or not the probability variation state or the high base state is set. The game control means determines whether to shift to the probability change state, the high base state, or both the probability change state and the high base state based on the random 8 and a state determination table described later. . Note that a probability variation determining random number that determines whether or not to make a probability change and a high base determination random number that determines whether or not to make a high base may be prepared separately. In this case, it is determined whether or not to make a probability change using a random number for probability change, and whether to make a high base using a high base determination random number, separately from the determination of whether or not to make a probability change May be.
(9) Random 9: Determines whether or not to end the probability change (for determining the probability change end). That is, the random 9 takes a value in the range of 0 to 49 and is used as a random number for determining whether or not to end the probability variation state. In the probability change state, the game control means ends the probability change state, for example, when the random 9 matches one predetermined value. Therefore, the probability variation state ends (probability variation puncture) with a probability of 1/50. In addition, instead of performing the probability variation end determination by lottery using the random number 9, the probability variation end determination may be performed by the probability variation continuation number determined using the probability variation number determination random number.
(10) Random 10: Determines the number of high base continuations (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates in the high base state) (for determining the number of high bases). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the high base continuation number is determined to be 100 times, 200 times, 500 times, or 1000 times according to a random value of 10. In addition, instead of performing the high base end determination based on the high base continuation number determined using the random number 10, the high base end determination may be performed by lottery using the high base end determination random number. Further, for example, if it is determined to shift to both the high base state and the probability variation state based on the state determination random number and the state determination table, the high base state may be continued until the probability variation state ends. Further, for example, if it is determined to shift to the high base state based on the state determination random number and the state determination table, the high base state may be continued until a big hit occurs for the first time.
(11) Random 11: Determine the initial value of random 8 (for determining the random 8 initial value)
(12) Random 12: Determine the initial value of random 9 (for determining the random 9 initial value)
(13) Random 13-1 to 13-3 (Random 13): For determining the left and right off-right symbols of decorative designs (decorative symbols left middle right)
(14) Random 14: Determines the combination of decorative symbols that generate a jackpot (for determining jackpot symbols)

  In this embodiment, when the transition condition to the probability variation state (determined to transition to the probability variation state based on random 8 and the state determination table) is satisfied, the gaming state is transitioned to the probability variation state after the end of the big hit game. . In the probability variation state, the probability that the result of the variation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol (the final stop symbol, also simply referred to as the stop symbol) becomes a big hit symbol is higher than that in the state that is not the probability variation state (low probability state). Hereinafter, this may be expressed as “a hit / displacement is determined with high probability in the probability variation state”. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the probability of a big hit symbol is increased 10 times in the probability variation state. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the gaming state is controlled to the probability changing state, a probability changing flag indicating that the gaming state is the probability changing state is set.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the transition condition to the high base state (determined to shift to the high base state based on the random 8 and the state determination table) is satisfied, the gaming state is set to the high base after the end of the big hit game. Transition to state. In the high base state, the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol and the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, compared to the case where the high base state is not. The time is extended (open extended state), making it easier to win a start. In this embodiment, as described later, when the gaming state is controlled to the high base state, a high base flag indicating that the gaming state is the high base state is set.

  In the high base state, the normal symbol shifts to the normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, or the normal symbol variation time of the normal symbol display unit 10 is shortened. You may make it easy to start and win by shifting to the short time state. Further, in the high base state, it is possible to make it easier to win a start by shifting to a special symbol time reduction state in which the variation time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shortened. By doing so, since the variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is shortened, the frequency of starting the variation of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is increased, and as a result, it is easy to make a start winning prize. Furthermore, in the high base state, it is possible to make it easier to win a start by shifting to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short state and special symbol short state). . In addition, by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state) Also good.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when both the transition condition to the probability variation state and the transition condition to the high base state are satisfied, after the big hit game is finished, the transition to the probability variation state and the high base state are controlled. The Then, if the end condition for the probability change state is satisfied before the end condition for the high base state is satisfied (random 9 coincides with a predetermined value and becomes a probability change puncture), the probability change state is ended and the gaming state is set to the high base state ( (Only in the high base state). Also, if the end condition of the high base state is satisfied before the end condition of the probability variation state is satisfied (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the high base state reaches the high base continuation number determined by the random 10), the high base state The state is terminated, and the gaming state is shifted to a probability changing state (a state having only a probability changing state). In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the gaming state is controlled to the probability changing state and to the high base state, the probability changing flag and the high base flag are set.

  In this embodiment, the state in which the gaming state is controlled to the probability variation state and the high base state is also referred to as the probability variation / high base state. Further, the state in which the gaming state is controlled only to the probability changing state (not controlled to the high base state) is also referred to as a probability changing / low base state. In addition, the state in which the gaming state is controlled only to the non-high state (not controlled to the probability variation state) is also referred to as a normal / high base state. Furthermore, the state where the gaming state is not controlled to the probability change state or the high base state is also referred to as a normal / low base state.

  In this embodiment, a case will be described in which it is determined whether or not the condition for transition to the probability change state or the high base state is satisfied based on the state determination random number (random 8) and the state determination table. The conditions for shifting to the high base state are not limited to those described above. For example, when the combination of the special symbol and the decorative symbol at the time of the stop is a predetermined jackpot symbol (probability variation symbol or high base symbol), the transition condition to the probability variation state or the high base state may be satisfied.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 47, the CPU 56 determines (2) big hit symbol determination random number, (5) normal symbol determination random number, (8) state determination random number, (9) The counter is incremented (added by 1) to generate the probability variation end determination random number of (10) and the high base number determination random number of (10). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. Further, in order to enhance the game effect, random numbers related to ordinary symbols other than the random numbers (1) to (14) may be used.

  When the determination random number update process, the initial value update process, and the display random number update process are performed, the CPU 56 causes the count value permutation change circuit 523 to change the count value permutation output from the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503. Processing is performed (step S26). In this embodiment, whether or not to execute the count value permutation change process is determined depending on whether or not the count value permutation change flag is set in step S158 of the random number circuit setting process. Then, the CPU 56 executes the count value permutation change process based on the fact that the count value permutation change flag is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S27). In the special symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. Further, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S28). In the normal symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command by setting an effect control command related to the decorative symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (decorative symbol command control process: step S29). Note that the fact that the variation of the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol means that the variation time (variable display period) is the same.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S30).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the prize opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a and the like (step S31). Specifically, a payout command command such as a prize ball number command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. . The payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 drives the ball payout device 97 in response to receiving a prize ball number command indicating the number of prize balls.

  And CPU56 performs the memory | storage process which checks the increase / decrease in a pending | holding memory | storage number (step S32). In addition, a test terminal process, which is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed (step S33). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 outputs the contents related to the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port 2 to the output port. (Step S34: Output processing). Thereafter, the CPU 56 sets the interrupt permitted state (step S35) and ends the process.

  In this embodiment, the game control process is started periodically (for example, every 2 ms). In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process has a flag. It may be executed in the main process based on the setting.

  In addition, for example, in the timer interrupt process, the switch process (see step S21), the initial value random number update process (see step S24), the decorative symbol command control process (see step S29), and an interrupt to be described later. Only the count process (see steps S3201a and S3202) may be executed, and other processes in the game control process may be executed in the main process. In this case, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 includes steps S22 to S28 (except for the interrupt count processing) and steps of the game control process in the loop process from step S17 to step S19 in the main process. Processing from S31 to step S35 (excluding step S33) is executed. In addition, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 counts the number of interrupts (the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed after detecting the winning detection signal) in the timer interrupt process (see step S3201a). When it is detected that the number of executions of the timer interrupt process has reached a predetermined number (for example, 3 times) (see step S3202), a condition for reading a random number value from the random number circuit 503 is satisfied (the execution condition for variable display is satisfied). ) And a random number read flag indicating that the random number read condition is satisfied is set. Whether the random number read flag is set when the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes the start port switch passage process (see step S312) in the special symbol process (see step S27) in the main process. If it is determined that the random number read flag is set, an output control signal SC is output to the random value storage circuit 531 of the random number circuit 503 (see step S3203). The stored random R value is read (see step S3204). Then, in the main process, the CPU 56 determines whether or not to make a big hit based on the read random number value when executing the special symbol normal process (see step S300) in the special symbol process (see step S27). It will be. In this embodiment, the processes of steps S21 to S35 (except for steps S30 and S33) correspond to a game control process for controlling the progress of the game.

  Next, the random number circuit initial value update process (step S22) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing random number circuit initial value update processing. In the random number circuit initial value update process, the CPU 56 checks the state of the notification signal indicating that the count value C output from the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 has been updated to the final value (step S220). When it is detected that the notification signal is in the on state, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the initial value update flag is set (step S221). That is, in the random number circuit setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the setting for updating the initial value is made when the count value is updated to a predetermined final value (see step S157).

  When the initial value update flag is set, the CPU 56 determines to update the initial value input to the counter 521 when the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 updates the count value to a predetermined final value. When the initial value update flag is set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the initial value change flag is set (step S222). That is, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the initial value of the count value is currently changed (that is, whether or not it is changed to a value based on the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560).

  When the initial value change flag is set (that is, when the initial value is currently changed based on the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560), the CPU 56 uses the initial value input to the counter 521 as the game control. The value based on the ID number of the microcomputer 560 is returned to the original value (for example, “1”) (step S223). Then, the CPU 56 resets the initial value change flag (step S224) and ends the initial value update process.

  If the initial value change flag is not set (that is, the initial value is not currently changed), the CPU 56 changes the initial value input to the counter 521 to a value based on the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560. (Step S225). In this case, for example, if the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 is “100”, the initial value input to the counter 521 is calculated by adding a predetermined value “100” to the ID number “100”. Change to the value “200”. Further, for example, the initial value input to the counter 521 is changed to the calculated value “50” obtained by subtracting the predetermined value “50” from the ID number “100”. Then, the CPU 56 sets an initial value change flag (step S226) and ends the initial value update process.

  When both the 12-bit random number circuit 503a and the 16-bit random number circuit 503b are set, in step S225, the CPU 56 sets the random number read from one random number circuit (for example, the 12-bit random number circuit 503a) as a predetermined value as an ID number. The initial value input to the counter 521 may be obtained. Then, the CPU 56 may use a random number read from the other one (for example, a 16-bit random number circuit 503b) as a random number for determining the big hit.

  When the CPU 56 updates the initial value input to the counter 521 in step S225, the CPU 56 checks the value of the random number maximum value setting register 535 of the comparator 522 of the random number circuit 503, and the value set based on the ID number is obtained. It is determined whether or not it is greater than the maximum random number. If the CPU 56 determines that the value set based on the ID number is equal to or greater than the maximum random number, the CPU 56 does not update the initial value input to the counter 521 with a predetermined value (for example, updates with the predetermined value “0”). do not do). By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation where the initial value of the count value is set to a value equal to or greater than the maximum random number.

  If it is determined in step S220 that the notification signal is in the OFF state, or if it is determined in step S221 that the initial value update flag is not set, the CPU 56 does not update the initial value input to the counter 521. Then, the random number circuit initial value update process is finished as it is, and the routine goes to Step S23.

  Next, the count value permutation change process (step S26) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the count value permutation change process. The CPU 56 performs a count value permutation change process by executing a process according to the count value permutation change program 554. In the count value permutation change process, the CPU 56 checks the state of the notification signal indicating that the count value C output from the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 has been updated to the final value (step S241). When it is detected that the notification signal is in the on state, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the count value permutation change flag is set (step S242). That is, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the setting for changing the permutation of the count values updated by the counter 521 when the count values are updated to a predetermined final value has been made in the random number circuit setting process (see step S158). Check.

  When the count value permutation change flag is set, the CPU 56 determines that the permutation of the count values updated by the counter 521 is changed when the counter 521 of the random number circuit 503 updates the count value to a predetermined final value. Then, the CPU 56 writes the count value permutation change data “01h” in the count value permutation change register 536 (step S243). That is, the CPU 56 causes the count value permutation change circuit 523 to change the permutation of the count values C input to the random value storage circuit 531 by writing the count value permutation change data “01h”.

  As described above, in the count value permutation changing process, when the random number is updated to a predetermined final value, the permutation of the count value updated by the counter 521 is changed, so that the randomness generated by the random number circuit 503 is more random. Can be improved.

  Next, the special symbol process (step S27) in the main process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process processing program executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560. When the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 performs the special symbol process, the variation shortening timer subtraction process (step S310) is performed, and the game ball is won in the start winning opening 14 provided in the game board 6. If the start opening switch 14a for detecting is turned on, that is, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the start winning opening 14 is generated (step S311), the start opening switch passing process (step S312) is performed. After that, any one of steps S300 to S308 is performed according to the internal state. The variation shortening timer is a timer for setting the variation time when the variation time of the special symbol is shortened.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): A state where variable symbol special display can be started (for example, the symbol variation has not been made in the special symbol display 8, and the previous symbol variation in the special symbol display 8 has ended) Waits for a predetermined period of time to elapse, and not a big hit game). When the special symbol variable display can be started, the start winning memory number for the special symbol is confirmed. If the number of starting winning prizes is not zero, it is determined whether or not the result of variable symbol special display is a big hit based on the random R generated by the random number circuit 503 stored in the special figure holding memory 570. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated so as to shift to step S301.

  Special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S301): A stop symbol after variable display of the special symbol is determined. Further, the stop symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol is determined. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated so as to shift to step S302.

  Variation time setting process (step S302): A variation pattern is determined, and variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: time from when variable display is started until display result is derived display (stop display)) is a special symbol It is determined to be a variable display variable time. However, in the case where the decorative symbol stop symbol is not a jackpot symbol after the display mode in the variable display device 9 is the reach mode, based on the time indicated by the variation pattern and the number of deviations of the decorative symbol stop symbol, Determines the variation time for variable display of special symbols. In addition, a variation time timer that measures the variation time of the determined special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated so as to shift to step S303.

  Special symbol variation process (step S303): When a predetermined time (the time indicated by the variation time timer in step S302) elapses, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S304.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): The special symbol on the special symbol display 8 is stopped. If the stop symbol of the special symbol is a big hit symbol, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S305. If not, the internal state is updated to shift to step S300. In this embodiment, the production control board 80 sets the fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer based on the fluctuation pattern command and the display result designation command from the main board 31, and updates the fluctuation time timer. Thus, the variation time of the decorative symbol is independently monitored, and when it is determined that the variation time has elapsed, the decorative symbol is stopped.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): Control for opening the large winning opening is started. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening) and a flag (a flag used when detecting winning in the prize opening) are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven. Open the big prize opening. Also, the process timer sets the execution time of the big prize opening opening process and sets the big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated so as to shift to step S306.

  Processing for opening a special prize opening (step S306): control for sending a presentation control command for round display of the special prize opening to the production control board 80 and closing conditions for the special prize opening (for example, a predetermined number (for example, 10 for the special prize opening) ) To confirm that the game ball has won a prize). When the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied, the internal state is updated to shift to step S307.

  Specific area valid time process (step S307): The presence / absence of passing through the V winning switch 22 is monitored, and a process of confirming that the big hit gaming state continuation condition is satisfied is performed. If the condition for continuing the big hit gaming state is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state is updated to shift to step S305. In addition, when the big hit gaming state continuation condition is not satisfied within a predetermined effective time, or when all rounds are finished, the internal state is updated to shift to step S308. If the V winning area is not provided, the internal state is not updated so as to shift to step S308 until all rounds are completed.

  Big hit end processing (step S308): Control for causing the effect control means to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state is updated so as to shift to step S300.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern used in this embodiment. In FIG. 52, “EXT” indicates EXT data of the second byte in the effect control command having a two-byte structure. “Time” indicates the variation time of the special symbol (variable display period of identification information).

  A variation pattern in which the EXT data is “00H” to “02H” is a variation pattern of normal variation in the special symbol display 8 or the variable display device 9 in the normal gaming state. As shown in FIG. 52, in this embodiment, three types of variation patterns of normal variation having different variation times and patterns are used. The variation patterns of EXT data “03H” to “08H” are variation patterns with reach, respectively, and can be selected when the gaming state is any of the normal gaming state, the probability variation state, and the high base state. Note that the fluctuation pattern of EXT data “03H” to “05H” is used when a special symbol or a stop symbol of a decorative symbol is used as a big hit symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 52, in this embodiment, three types of variation patterns at the time of reach (when they are out of place) with different variation times and patterns are used. In addition, the variation pattern in which the EXT data is “06H” to “08H” is used when a special symbol or a stop symbol of a decorative symbol is not a big hit symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 52, in this embodiment, three types of variation patterns (in the case of big hit) with different variation times and patterns are used.

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 mounted on the production control board 80 independently monitors the variation time of the decorative design based on the fluctuation pattern command and the display result designation command received from the main board 31. Then, when it is determined that the variation time has elapsed, a process of stopping the decorative design is performed. In this case, when the display pattern of the variable display device 9 is set to the reach mode and the stop pattern of the decorative pattern is not a jackpot symbol, the same variation pattern command (the effect control command whose EXT data is “03H”) is received. Even in such a case, the variation time varies depending on the number of stoppages of the decorative symbols. For example, when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is “757”, the variation time becomes longer by the amount of one stop symbol shift as compared with the case where the stop symbol is “767”.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the effect control means obtains the number of deviations of the stop symbol when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is not a jackpot symbol after the display mode of the variable display device 9 is set to the reach mode. Further, the effect control means variably displays the time obtained by adding (or subtracting) the time corresponding to the number of stop symbol shifts obtained from the display result designation command to the time indicated by the fluctuation pattern of EXT data “03H”. It is obtained as a variation time (variable display period) in the device 9. Then, the effect control means varies the decorative design of the variable display device 9 according to the obtained variation time. Therefore, when the display pattern on the variable display device 9 is set to the reach mode and the stop pattern of the decorative symbol is not a big hit symbol, the time indicated by the variation pattern of EXT data “03H” It represents the basic time for specifying the fluctuation time.

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control board 80. In the example shown in FIG. 53, commands 8000 (H) to 8008 (H) are effect control commands (variation) for designating a variation pattern of decorative symbols variably displayed on the variable display device 9 in response to variable display of special symbols. Pattern command). Commands 8000 (H) to 8002 (H) are variation pattern commands for designating a variation pattern of normal variation. Commands 8003 (H) to 8005 (H) designate a variation pattern (basic time of variation) when the decorative symbol stop symbol is not a jackpot symbol after the display mode of the variable display device 9 is set to the reach mode. This is a variation pattern command. Commands 8006 (H) to 8008 (H) are variation pattern commands for designating a variation pattern when the stop symbol of a decorative symbol is a jackpot symbol after the display mode of the variable display device 9 is set to a reach mode.

  Commands 91XX (H) to 93XX (H) are effect control commands (display result designation commands) for designating decorative symbols to be stopped. The command 91XX (H) is a display result designation command for designating a stop symbol of the left decorative symbol in the three symbol display areas “left middle right” of the variable display device 9. A command 92XX (H) is a display result designation command for designating a stop symbol of the decorative design in the middle. Command 93XX (H) is a display result designation command for designating a stop symbol of the right decorative symbol. A symbol number is set in “XX”.

  In this embodiment, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined in the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process (step S27) together with the special symbol stop symbol, and the stop determined as such. An effect control command (91XX (H) to 93XX (H)) designating a decorative design corresponding to the design is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100. In response to the reception of the decorative design designation effect control commands (91XX (H) to 93XX (H)), the production control microcomputer 100 stops the decorative symbols ("missing", "non-probable big hit"). “Probable big hit”) is displayed on the variable display device 9. As will be described later, if the decorative design stop symbol is not a jackpot symbol after the display mode of the variable display device 9 is set to the reach mode, the production control microcomputer 100 performs the production control commands (91XX (H) to 93XX (H)) to specify the number of stop symbols of the decorative symbol. Then, the effect control microcomputer uses the time corresponding to the calculated number of decorative symbol shifts and the variation of the decorative symbol in the variable display device 9 based on the basic time indicated by the variation pattern command (8001 (H)). Ask for time.

  In addition, when the decorative pattern stop symbol is not a jackpot symbol after the display mode in the variable display device 9 is set to the reach mode, the game control microcomputer 560 displays a display result for designating all the left, middle and right decorative symbols. Instead of transmitting each designated command, a command (also referred to as a symbol deviation number designation command) in which a number indicating the number of symbol deviations is set in “XX” may be transmitted. Even when such a command is received, the production control microcomputer 100 can specify the time corresponding to the number of decorative symbol shifts, and can specify the decorative symbol variation time in the variable display device 9. .

  Commands B500 (H) to B503 (H) are effect control commands (big hit end designation commands) for designating the big hit end in the variable display device 9. The commands B500 (H) to B502 (H) are effect control commands (specific jackpot end) that specify the end of jackpot when the gaming state is shifted to at least one of the probable state and the high base state after the jackpot game ends. Display command). Command B500 (H) designates that the gaming state is shifted to the probable change state and the high base state is transferred after the end of the big hit game. Command B501 (H) is an effect control command (specific jackpot end display command) for designating the end of a big hit when the gaming state is shifted to the probability change state after the big hit game is over. Command B502 (H) is an effect control command (specific jackpot end display command) for designating the end of jackpot when the gaming state is shifted to the high base state after the jackpot game ends. Command B503 (H) is an effect control command (non-specific jackpot end display command) for designating the end of jackpot when the gaming state does not shift to either the probability change state or the high base state after the jackpot game ends. .

  Command B600 (H) is an effect control command (normal display designation command) for designating the end of notification of the probability change state or the high base state in the variable display device 9.

  When the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31, it responds to the contents shown in FIG. The display state of the variable display device 9 is changed. Further, lamp control and sound output control according to the received effect control command are executed. Note that effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIG. 53 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, an effect control command for changing the background color of the screen of the variable display device 9 according to the gaming state, an effect control command for designating a customer waiting demonstration, and the like are transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

  Next, a state determination table used for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the probability change state or the high base state will be described. 54 to 57 are explanatory diagrams illustrating examples of a state determination table for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the probability changing state or the high base state. FIG. 54 shows a state determination table (normal / low base state determination table) used when the current gaming state (the gaming state when it is determined to be a big hit) is the normal state (non-probability change state) and the low base state. It is also called). FIG. 55 is a state determination table (also referred to as a probability change / low base state determination table) used when the current gaming state is a probability variation state and a low base state. FIG. 56 is a state determination table (also referred to as a normal / high base state determination table) used when the current gaming state is the normal state and the high base state. FIG. 57 is a state determination table (also referred to as a probability change / high base state determination table) used when the current gaming state is a probability variation state and a high base state.

  When the gaming state is a normal / low base state, as shown in FIG. 54, when the value of random 8 is 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, or 18, After the game is over, the gaming state (control state of the gaming machine) shifts to the probability change state (probability change / low base state). When the value of random 8 is 7 or 17, the gaming state shifts to the high base state (normal / high base state) after the big hit game is over. Furthermore, when the value of random 8 is 9 or 19, after the big hit game, the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state and shifts to the high base state (probability changing / high base state). That is, when the gaming state is the normal / low base state, the rate is changed to the probability / low base state at a rate of 50%, is shifted to the normal / high base state at the rate of 10%, and is changed / high at the rate of 10%. Transition to base state.

  Further, when the gaming state is the probability variation / low base state, as shown in FIG. 55, when the value of random 8 is 0, 2, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16 or 18, the big hit game ends. Later, the gaming state shifts to a probability variation state (probability variation / low base state). When the value of random 8 is 3, 5, 7, 13, 15 or 17, the gaming state shifts to the high base state (normal / high base state) after the big hit game is over. Furthermore, when the value of random 8 is 4, 9, 14, or 19, after the big hit game, the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state and shifts to the high base state (probability changing / high base state). That is, when the gaming state is probabilistic / low base state, it is transferred to the probabilistic / low base state at a rate of 40%, is transferred to the normal / high base state at a rate of 30%, and is probable / high at a rate of 20%. Transition to base state.

  Further, when the gaming state is the normal / high base state, as shown in FIG. 56, when the value of random 8 is 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, or 18. After the big hit game, the gaming state shifts to a probability variation state (probability variation / low base state). When the value of random 8 is 7 or 17, the gaming state shifts to the high base state (normal / high base state) after the big hit game is over. Furthermore, when the value of random 8 is 9 or 19, after the big hit game, the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state and shifts to the high base state (probability changing / high base state). That is, when the gaming state is a normal / high base state, the probability is changed to a probability / low base state at a rate of 50%, is changed to a normal / high base state at a rate of 10%, and is changed / high at a rate of 10%. Transition to base state.

  Further, when the gaming state is the probability variation / high base state, as shown in FIG. 57, if the value of random 8 is 2 or 12, the gaming state is the probability variation state (probability variation / low base after the big hit game ends). State). When the value of random 8 is 4, 6, 8, 10, 14, 16, or 18, the gaming state shifts to the high base state (normal / high base state) after the big hit game is over. Further, when the value of random 8 is 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, or 19, after the big hit game, the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state and the high base state (probability changing / (High base state). That is, when the gaming state is the normal / high base state, the rate is changed to the probability / low base state at a rate of 10%, the rate is changed to the normal / high base state at the rate of 35%, and the probability is changed / high at the rate of 50%. Transition to base state.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process (step S312). In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 sets the start winning memory number indicated by the start winning counter (or the start winning memory number stored in the special figure holding memory 570) to 4 which is the maximum value. It is confirmed whether it has reached (step S3201). If the start winning memorized number has not reached 4, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the interrupt counter indicating the number of times the timer interrupt process has been executed (step S3201a). That is, the CPU 56 executes a process of counting the number of times that the timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, by executing step S3201a, the CPU 56 counts up an interrupt counter that indicates the number of times the timer interrupt process has been executed each time the timer interrupt process is executed. When the value of the interrupt count counter is incremented by 1, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the number of executions of the timer interrupt process indicated by the interrupt execution count counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 3 times) (step S3202). ). Then, after the game ball has won the start winning opening 14, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the interrupt execution counter has reached a predetermined number. When it is detected that the game ball has won the start winning opening 14 (that is, when YES is determined in step S3202), the CPU 56 resets the interrupt execution counter.

  The value set in advance as the predetermined number of times in step S3202 is determined as follows. As described above, the timer circuit 534 of the random number circuit 503 measures the time during which the winning detection signal SS is continuously input from the start port switch 14a, and detects that the measurement time has reached a predetermined period, Write numerical value capture data “01h”. In this embodiment, a predetermined period (for example, 3 ms) measured by the timer circuit 534 is a period in which a predetermined number of timer interrupt processes are executed (for example, when the timer interrupt process for every 2 ms is executed three times). The predetermined number (for example, 3 times) used in step S3202 is set so as to be shorter than 6 ms). By setting in this way, it is possible to prevent the random number from being read again after the random number is read and before the random number value stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is updated. It is possible to prevent a random number having the same value as the random number read from the circuit 531 from being read again. The timer circuit 534 does not measure the input time of the winning detection signal SS, but the CPU 56 measures the input time of the winning detection signal SS and writes the random number value fetch data “01h” into the random value fetch register 539. May be.

  When the number of executions of the timer interrupt process has reached a predetermined number, the CPU 56 can output the output control signal SC to the random number storage circuit 531 of the specified random number circuit 503 and read the random number storage circuit 531 (enable). The state is controlled (step S3203).

  The CPU 56 reads the random R value stored as the random number value from the random value storage circuit 531 of the random number circuit 503 (step S3204). Further, the CPU 56 stores the read random R value in the storage area (special symbol determination buffer (special symbol holding memory 570)) corresponding to the value of the number of start winning memories (step S3205). When the CPU 56 stores the value of the random R in the buffer area, the CPU 56 stops outputting the output control signal SC to the random value storage circuit 531 and controls the random value storage circuit 531 to be unreadable (disabled) (step). S3206). Further, the CPU 56 resets the interrupt execution number counter (step S3207). Then, the CPU 56 sets the random R value stored in the predetermined buffer area at the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation memory 570 (step S3208), and increments the count of the start prize counter by 1 to store the start prize memory. The number is increased by 1 (step S3209).

  Further, the CPU 56 extracts values of random numbers (software random numbers) such as determination random numbers and display random numbers, and stores them in a storage area (special symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the start winning memory number ( Step S3210). Note that extracting a random number means reading a count value from a counter for generating a random number and setting the read count value as a random value. In step S3210, random numbers 1 to 4 and random numbers 8 to 14 are extracted from the random numbers shown in FIG.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets the fluctuation time reduction determination time for determining whether or not to reduce the fluctuation time in the fluctuation reduction timer (step S3211). As described above, the variation shortening timer set here is subtracted in step S310.

  If the start winning memorization is stored in step S3201, but the maximum value of 4 has been reached, and if the number of executions of the timer interrupt process has not reached the predetermined number in step S3202, the start port switch passing process is terminated.

  As described above, the timer interrupt process has been executed a predetermined number of times when reading the random R from the random value storage circuit 531 in the starting port switch passing process (that is, continued while the timer interrupt process is executed a predetermined number of times). The random number is read from the random value storage circuit 531 on the condition that the winning detection signal SS is input). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the random number from being read again after the random number is read and before the value of the random number stored in the random value storage circuit 531 is updated. Further, it is possible to prevent a random number having the same value as the random number read from the previous random number value storage circuit 531 from being read again.

  Next, the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process will be described. 59, 60 and 61 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 can start the variation of the special symbol (for example, when the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300) ( Step S3301), the value of the start winning memorization number (holding memorization number) is confirmed (step S3302). Specifically, the count value of the start winning storage counter is confirmed. The case where the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300 is a case where the symbol is not changed in the variable display device 9 and is not in the big hit game. If the change cannot be started in step S3301 or if the number of reserved memories is 0 in step S3302, the CPU 56 ends the special symbol normal process as it is.

  If the number of reserved memories is not 0, each random value (random R, random numbers for determination, random numbers for display) stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories = 1 is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. At the same time (step S3303), the value of the reserved storage number is decreased by 1 (the value of the start winning storage counter is decreased by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S3304). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = n−1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories is extracted always matches the order of the number of reserved memories = 1, 2, 3 and 4. Yes. That is, in this example, every time the variable display start condition is satisfied, the CPU 56 executes a process of shifting the contents of each storage area.

  Further, the CPU 56 determines whether or not to end the probability change (steps S3305 to S3307). Specifically, when the probability change flag is set (step S3305), the CPU 56 reads out the probability change end determination random number (random 9) from the storage area (step S3306), and the value of the read random 9 is Then, it is determined whether or not it coincides with the probability variation end value (step S3307), and if it agrees, the probability variation flag is reset and the probability variation state is terminated (step S3308). Therefore, when the probability variation state ends based on the random 9 value, the lottery based on the low probability state is executed in the jackpot determination in step S3314. If the probability variation flag is not set in step S3305, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S3309 as it is.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the probability variation / low base state, only the probability variation flag is set. Therefore, in step S3308, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag and performs the probability variation state. And the gaming state is shifted to the normal / low base state. Further, when the gaming state is controlled to the probability variation / high base state, both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set. Therefore, in step S3308, the CPU 56 resets only the probability variation flag, and the game The state will be shifted to the normal / high base state.

  When the probability variation flag is not set in step S3305 or when the probability variation flag is reset in step S3308, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag is set (step S3309). That is, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a high base state. If the high base flag is not set, the CPU 56 executes a process of transmitting a normal display designation effect control command (normal display designation command) to the effect control means (effect control board 80) (step S3310). The process moves to step S3311. Specifically, in step S3310, CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in ROM 54) corresponding to the normal display designation command as a pointer. Then, based on the fact that the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command (normal display designation command) is set in the pointer, the normal display designation command is transmitted in the decorative design command control process (step S29). When receiving the normal display designation command, the effect control CPU 101 stops the effect using the sound, the display, the light emitter, etc., and ends the notification that the probability change state or the high base state is set.

  If the high base flag is set, the gaming state is controlled to the high base state, so the CPU 56 proceeds directly to step S3311 without executing the process of transmitting the normal display designation command. To do. Even when it is determined in step S3307 that the probability change state is not terminated, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S3311 without executing the process of transmitting the normal display designation command.

  Further, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step S3311). That is, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the gaming state is controlled to the certain change state. In this case, if it is determined in step S3307 that the probability variation state is not terminated, the gaming state is controlled to the probability variation state. If the probability change flag is not set in step S3305 or if it is determined in step S3307 that the probability change state is to be ended, the gaming state is controlled to a normal state other than the probability change state.

  When the probability variation flag is not set, the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a normal state other than the probability variation state, and is a table used for determining whether or not the display result of the special symbol display device 8 is a jackpot symbol. The normal big hit determination table 571a (see FIG. 38A) is set (step S3312). Further, when the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a probability change state, and as a table used to determine whether or not the display result of the special symbol display device 8 is a jackpot symbol. A probability change big hit determination table 571b (see FIG. 38B) is set (step S3313).

  The CPU 56 determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol display device 8 is a jackpot symbol based on the value of the random R stored in the random number buffer area (step S3314). In this case, the CPU 56 uses the normal-time big hit determination table 571a set in step S3312 or the probability change big hit determination table 571b set in step S3313 to determine whether or not to win. If it is determined that the display result of the special symbol display device 8 is a jackpot symbol, the CPU 56 turns on a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot state (step S3315).

  Further, when the CPU 56 decides to make a big hit, it performs a state determination process for determining whether or not to make a probable change and whether to make a high base (steps S3316 to S3330). In the state determination process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step S3316). When the probability variation flag is set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag is set (step S3317). When the high base flag is set, the CPU 56 determines that the current gaming state is the probability change / high base state, and the probability determination / high base state determination shown in FIG. 57 is performed as a state determination table used for the state determination processing. A table is set (step S3318). When the high base flag is not set, the CPU 56 determines that the current gaming state is the probability variation / low base state, and the probability variation / low base state determination shown in FIG. 55 is used as the state determination table used for the state determination processing. A table is set (step S3319).

  If the probability variation flag is not set in step S3316, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag is set (step S3320). When the high base flag is set, the CPU 56 determines that the current gaming state is the normal / high base state, and the normal / high base state determination shown in FIG. 56 is performed as a state determination table used for the state determination process. A table is set (step S3321). When the high base flag is not set, the CPU 56 determines that the current gaming state is the normal / low base state, and uses the normal / low base state determination shown in FIG. 54 as the state determination table used for the state determination process. A table is set (step S3322).

  The CPU 56 reads the state determination random number from the random number storage buffer (step S3323), and executes the state determination module (step S3324). In this case, the CPU 56 determines which state to shift the gaming state to based on the state determination table set in step S3318, S3319, S3321 or S3322. Specifically, the CPU 56 specifies the state corresponding to the value of the read state determination random number (random 8) from the set state determination table, thereby setting the gaming state to the normal / low base state and the probability variation / low base. Determine whether to transition to the state, normal / high base state or probabilistic / high base state. Note that the state determination module is a program that determines which state the gaming state is to be transferred to based on the state determination random number.

  When it is determined that the probability variation / high base is set (step S3325), the CPU 56 sets a probability variation determination flag and a high base determination flag (step S3326). The probability variation determination flag is a flag indicating that it is determined to establish the condition for shifting to the probability variation state. The high base determination flag is a flag indicating that it has been determined to establish the condition for shifting to the high base state.

  When it is determined that the probability variation (probability variation / low base) is set (step S3327), the CPU 56 sets a probability variation determination flag (step S3328). Furthermore, when it is determined that the high base (normal / high base) is set (step S3329), the CPU 56 sets a high base determination flag (step S3330). If it is determined that neither probability change nor high base is to be performed (normal / low base), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S3331 without setting either the probability change determination flag or the high base determination flag.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S3331).

  As described above, in the state determination process in step S3324, the CPU 56 determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to the probability change state based on the state determination random number (random 8) and the state determination table. To determine whether to shift to the high base state. Therefore, in addition to performing control to shift the gaming state to a probable state based on the establishment of a predetermined high probability condition, it is possible to perform control to transition the gaming state to a high base state based on the establishment of a high release condition. it can. Therefore, the player can recognize whether or not the current gaming state is advantageous by making the player feel a change in the rate at which the variable winning device 15 is opened.

  Further, the CPU 56 may change the gaming state into a plurality of types of states, such as when shifting to only the probability variation state (probability variation / low base state), or when transitioning to the probability variation state and transitioning to the high base state (probability variation / high base state). Control to shift to. It is configured to determine the state to shift the gaming state at different selection ratios depending on which state the current gaming state is, so the player is specified to which state the gaming state is to be transferred Can be difficult. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in which game state is to be changed during the game, and maintain the player's interest in the game.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop symbol setting process, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S361). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 determines the special symbol stop symbol (big hit symbol) based on the random 2 (random symbol for determining the big hit symbol for the special symbol) stored in the special symbol determination buffer. (Step S362). In addition to determining the stop symbol of the special symbol, the CPU 56 also stops the decorative symbol (big hit symbol) based on the random 14 (random number for determining the big hit symbol for the decorative symbol) stored in the special symbol determination buffer. ) Is determined (step S363).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S361, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is stopped based on the random 1 stored in the special symbol determination buffer (the random symbol for determining the special symbol for the special symbol). ) Is determined (step S364). Further, the CPU 56 determines whether or not to reach based on the reach determination random number (random 4) stored in the special symbol determination buffer (step S365).

  If it is determined that the reach is to be achieved (that is, the decorative symbol stop symbol is not to be the jackpot symbol after the reach mode is set) (step S366), the CPU 56 selects random 13 (decorative symbol for the decorative symbol) stored in the special symbol determination buffer. On the basis of the random symbol for determining the off symbol), the stop symbol (off symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined (step S367).

  In this embodiment, when performing the reach effect in the variable display on the variable display device 9, the effect is performed in such a manner that the two left and right decorative symbols have the same design. If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is not used as the jackpot symbol after the reach mode is set, only the central decorative symbol is displayed on the variable display device 9 so as to be different from the left and right decorative symbols. In this embodiment, in step S367, the CPU 56 determines the two left and right decorative symbols based on random 13-1 (the random symbol determining random number for the left decorative symbol) out of the random symbol determining random symbols. (In other words, the left and right decorative symbols are determined to be the same). The CPU 56 may determine the two left and right decorative designs based on random 13-3 (the random design determining random number for the right decorative design). Then, the CPU 56 determines the inside decorative design based on the random 13-2 (the random design determining random number for the internal decorative design).

  In addition, when the determined decorative symbol is the same as the previously determined left and right decorative symbols, the decorative symbol stop symbol becomes a combination of the same symbols as the jackpot symbol. Therefore, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the determined decorative design is the same as the left and right decorative designs, and if they are the same design, the CPU 56 determines from the design specified based on the random 13-2. The symbol shifted by one may be determined as the inside decorative symbol.

  If the reach is not reached in step S366, the CPU 56 stops the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol (random symbol for determining the decorative symbol for the decorative symbol) stored in the special symbol determination buffer 13-1. The detachment symbol is determined (step S368). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the left decorative symbol based on the random 13-1 (the random symbol determining random number for the left decorative symbol) among the random symbols for determining the negative symbol. Further, the CPU 56 determines the decorative pattern in the middle based on the random 13-2 (the random symbol for determining the falling pattern for the decorative pattern in the middle). Further, the CPU 56 determines the right decorative design based on the random 13-3 (the random design determining random number for the right decorative design).

  Note that if the determined left and right decorative symbols coincide with each other by chance, the decorative symbol stop symbol is a combination of the same symbols as at the time of reach. Therefore, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the determined left and right decorative symbols are the same symbol. The symbol may be determined as the right (or left) decorative symbol.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation time setting process (step S369).

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation time setting process (step S302) in the special symbol process. In the variable time setting process, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 uses a combination of symbols (for example, “middle left” when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in the special symbol stop symbol setting process is not a big hit after reaching the reach mode. In the case of a combination of symbols that differ only in the “middle” symbol of the three “right” symbols (also referred to as reach / missing symbol) (step S391a), the deviation of the missing symbol is determined based on the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol. The number is specified (step S391b). For example, when the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol is “767”, the CPU 56 specifies the deviation number “1”. For example, when the stop symbol of the specified decorative design is “757”, the CPU 56 specifies the number of deviations “2”.

  The CPU 56 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the value of the variation pattern determination random number. In this case, the CPU 56 specifies the variation time of the special symbol based on the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern and the number of deviations of the missing symbol identified in step S391b (step S391c). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 specifies that the basic time of the special symbol is 10 seconds when the determined stop symbol is a reach / delay symbol (see FIG. 52). Further, the CPU 56 specifies a time corresponding to the specified number of deviations (a time required for extra fluctuations with respect to the basic time due to the deviation of the symbols when the decorative symbols fluctuate). For example, when the specified number of deviations is “1”, the CPU 56 specifies the corresponding time as 1 second. For example, when the specified number of deviations is “2”, the CPU 56 specifies the corresponding time as 2 seconds. Then, the CPU 56 specifies the time obtained by adding (or subtracting) the time corresponding to the number of deviations to the specified basic time as the variation time of the special symbol. For example, when the specified number of deviations is “1”, the CPU 56 specifies the variation time of the special symbol as 11 seconds. For example, when the specified number of deviations is “2”, the CPU 56 specifies the variation time of the special symbol as 12 seconds.

  In step S391a, when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is not a reach / displacement symbol (for example, a symbol combination when the jackpot is made after reaching, or a symbol combination not reaching the reach), the CPU 56 determines a random number for determining the variation pattern. Based on this value, the variation time of the special symbol is determined and the variation pattern is determined (S391d).

  When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 56 sets the address of the determined command transmission table for designating the variation pattern in the pointer (step S392). In this embodiment, the decorative design command control process (see step S29) in the timer interrupt process is executed based on the fact that the address of the transmission table is set in step S392, thereby producing an effect control command ( Variation pattern command) is transmitted to the effect control board 80.

  In this embodiment, each effect control command that can be transmitted to the effect control means is stored in the command transmission table of the ROM 54. In the decorative symbol command control process, the CPU 56 sets the effect control command data stored at the address of the ROM 54 indicated by the pointer as an output port for outputting the effect control command data, and transmits the command. An effect control INT signal is output.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the address of the command transmission table for designating the display result indicating the display result of the decorative symbols determined using the random symbols 13-1 to 13-3 in the special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S393). . In this embodiment, the decorative design command control process (see step S29) in the timer interrupt process is executed based on the fact that the address of the transmission table is set in step S393, thereby producing an effect control command ( Display result designation command) is transmitted to the effect control board 80. In this case, the command 91XX (H) is transmitted as a display result designation command for designating the stop symbol of the left decorative symbol, and the command 92XX (H) is transmitted as a display result designation command for designating the stop symbol of the middle decorative symbol. Then, command 93XX (H) is transmitted as a display result designation command for designating the stop symbol of the right decorative design (see FIG. 53).

  When the variation time of the special symbol is determined in step S391, the CPU 56 sets variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the special symbol process timer and starts measuring the variation time (step S394). The execution flag is set, and the special symbol display on the special symbol display 8 is started (step S395). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S396).

  Next, the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit is set (step S3402). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag and the high base flag (steps S3404 and S3405). Further, the high base number counter is cleared (step S3406), and the process proceeds to step S3417. The high base number counter is a counter in which a number indicating how many times the special symbol is changed will end the high base state.

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S3402, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S3411). If it is set, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the high base number counter by -1 (step S3412). However, if it is already 0, no subtraction is performed. If the high base flag is not set in step S3411, the process proceeds to step S3417.

  When the value of the high base number counter is decremented by 1 and the value of the high base number counter becomes 0 (step S3413), the CPU 56 resets the high base flag and ends the high base state (step S3414). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting a normal display designation effect control command to notify the effect control board 80 that the normal state has been returned (step S3416). Specifically, in step S3316, CPU 56 sets the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the normal display designation command as a pointer. Then, based on the fact that the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command (normal display designation command) is set in the pointer, the normal display designation command is transmitted in the decorative design command control process (step S29). If the probability variation flag is not set in step S3415, the process proceeds to step S3417.

  In step S3417, if it is determined to be a big hit, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to shift to step S305. If not, the internal state is updated to shift to step S300.

  Next, the big hit end process (step S308) in the special symbol process will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process executed when the jackpot game ends. In the big hit ending process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base determination flag is set (step S3501). When the high base determination flag is set, the CPU 56 further checks whether or not the probability variation determination flag is set (step S3502). If the probability variation determination flag is set, the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set (step S3503).

  Further, the CPU 56 determines the high base continuation number based on the high base number determination random number (random 10) (step S3504), and sets the determined high base continuation number in the high base number counter (step S3505). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 determines the high base continuation number as 100 times, 200 times, 500 times, or 1000 times, and sets the determined high base continuation number in the high base number counter. Instead of determining the high base number of times using the high base number determination random number, a predetermined value may be set in the high base number counter. For example, 100 may be set as a predetermined value in the hourly number counter.

  If the probability variation determination flag is not set in step S3502, the CPU 56 sets the high base flag (step S3509), and proceeds to step S3504.

  In addition, the CPU 56 notifies the effect control means of the end of the jackpot gaming state and the transition control command (specifying the specific jackpot end display designation) in order to notify the transition to a specific gaming state (probability change state or high base state). A process of transmitting a jackpot end display command) is performed (step S3506). In this case, when both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set (that is, when shifting to the probability variation state and the high base state), the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command B500 (H) shown in FIG. . Further, when only the high base flag is set (that is, when shifting to the high base state only), the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command B502 (H) shown in FIG. Specifically, in step S3506, CPU 56 sets the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the specific jackpot end display command as a pointer. Then, based on the fact that the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the production control command (specific jackpot end display command) is set in the pointer, the specific jackpot end display command is transmitted in the decorative symbol command control process (step S29). . When receiving the specific jackpot end display command, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect using sound, display, light-emitting body, and the like, and notifies that it is in a probable change state or a high base state.

  When the specific big hit end display command is transmitted, the CPU 56 resets the high base determination flag and the probability variation determination flag (step S3507). Then, the CPU 56 sets the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S3508).

  If the high base determination flag is not set in step S3501, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation determination flag is set (step S3510). If the probability variation determination flag has been set, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag (step S3511), and proceeds to step S3506. In step S3506, the CPU 56 notifies the effect control means of the end of the jackpot gaming state and the transition to a specific gaming state (probability change state), a specified jackpot end display designation effect control command (specific A process of transmitting a jackpot end display command) is performed (step S3506). In this case, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command B501 (H) shown in FIG. Specifically, in step S3512, CPU 56 sets the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the specific jackpot end display command as a pointer. Then, based on the fact that the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the production control command (specific jackpot end display command) is set in the pointer, the specific jackpot end display command is transmitted in the decorative symbol command control process (step S29). . When receiving the specific jackpot end display command, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect using sound, display, light emitter, and the like, and notifies that it is in a probable change state.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 variably displays different background images depending on whether it is in the high base state or the low base state when notifying that it is a specific gaming state. The information is displayed on the device 9, and each electric component is controlled in different rendering modes. For example, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the gaming state is the high base state based on the reception of the command B500 (H) shown in FIG. 53 as the specific jackpot end display command, and notifies according to the high base state. I do. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the gaming state is the low base state based on the reception of the command B501 (H) shown in FIG. 53 as the specific jackpot end display command, and responds to the low base state. Make a notification.

  When the probability change determination flag is not set in step S3510 (that is, neither the probability change state nor the high base state), the CPU 56 designates the non-specific jackpot end display designation in order to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state. Processing for transmitting an effect control command (non-specific big hit end display command) is performed (step S3513), and the process proceeds to step S3507. In this case, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command B503 (H) shown in FIG. Specifically, in step S3513, the CPU 56 sets the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the non-specific big hit end display command as a pointer. Then, based on the fact that the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command (non-specific jackpot end display command) is set in the pointer, the non-specific jackpot end display command is transmitted in the decorative symbol command control process (step S29). Is done. When receiving the non-specific jackpot end display command, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect using sound, display, light emitter, etc., and notifies the end of the jackpot gaming state. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 notifies the end of the big hit gaming state in an effect mode different from steps S3506 and S3512.

  FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of how the gaming state changes. FIG. 66 shows an example in which the transition condition to the probability change state and the transition condition to the high base state are satisfied at the same time, and when the jackpot gaming state ends, the probability change state is controlled and the high base state is controlled. It is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 66, the probability variation puncture based on random 9 occurs before the variation of the special symbol of the high base continuation count (100 in this example) is terminated, and the probability variation / high base state is terminated. Transitioning to normal / high base state. In this example, the initial value of the high base number counter is 100. However, since the step is started from the time when it is controlled to the probability variation / high base state, the probability variation / high base is shifted to the normal / high base state. When the number of special symbol changes for the remaining number of times after the number of special symbol changes during the state continuation is subtracted from the initial value 100 of the high base number counter, the value of the high base number counter becomes 0 and the high base flag Reset (exit high base state).

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of how the gaming state changes. In FIG. 67, the transition condition to the probability change state and the transition condition to the high base state are satisfied at the same time, and when the big hit gaming state ends, the probability change state is controlled and the high base state is controlled, and the high base continuation is continued. An example is shown in which the probability variation state does not end even when the number of special symbol variations of the number of times (100 in this example) ends, that is, the probability variation puncture based on random 9 does not occur. In this example, the initial value of the high base number counter is 100. However, since the step is started from the time when it is controlled to the probability variation / high base state, the value becomes 0 when the fluctuation of 100 times is finished, and the high base number counter is high. The flag is reset. Then, even after the high base flag is reset and the high base state ends, the probability variation state continues.

  Next, payout control signals and payout control commands transmitted and received between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 will be described. FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a control signal output from the game control means to the payout control means. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation signal is transmitted and received as a control signal between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 in order to perform various controls relating to payout control and the like. As shown in FIG. 68, the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 31 rises (when the game control means starts the game control process), indicating that the main board 31 has risen with respect to the payout control board 37. This is a signal for notification (connection confirmation signal for the main board 31). The connection confirmation signal indicates that the winning ball can be paid out.

  Similarly to the game control microcomputer 560, the payout control microcomputer 370 includes a serial communication circuit 375. Various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 505 built in the game control microcomputer 560 and the serial communication circuit 375 built in the payout control microcomputer 370. The configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 375 built in the payout control microcomputer 370 are the same as the configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 505 built in the game control microcomputer 560.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of control commands transmitted and received between the game control means and the payout control means. In this embodiment, various control commands are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 in order to perform various controls relating to the payout control and the like.

  The award ball number command is a command that is output to designate the number of game balls (0 to 15) for which a payout request is made. In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the start port switch 14a, four prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball is detected by any of the prize port switches 33a, 39a, 29a, 30a, seven balls are detected. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, 15 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when a game ball is detected by the start port switch 14a, a prize ball number command “04” for notifying the number of prize balls of 4 is transmitted, and any of the prize port switches 33a, 39a, 29a, 30a is transmitted. When a game ball is detected, a prize ball number command “07” for notifying the number of prize balls 7 is transmitted, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the number of prize balls 15 is notified. The award ball number command “0F” is transmitted. The award ball number command may be composed of 2 bytes. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 first writes the lower 1 byte data of the prize ball number command to the transmission data register 710. When the transmission of the lower 1 byte data of the prize ball number command from the transmission shift register 712 is completed, the CPU 56 responds to the transmission interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505, and the CPU 56 receives the upper 1 byte of the prize ball number command. Data is written to the transmission data register 710, and the upper byte data of the prize ball number command is transmitted from the transmission shift register 712.

  The prize ball ACK command “D2” is a command for notifying the game control means that the payout control means has received the prize ball number command. The prize ball ACK command corresponds to a reception confirmation signal indicating that a prize ball number command has been received.

  70 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmission / reception of the control signal shown in FIG. 68 and the control command shown in FIG. FIG. 70 also shows a power-off signal. As shown in FIG. 70, the connection confirmation signal is output by the game control microcomputer 560 via the output circuit 67 and input to the payout control microcomputer 370 via the input circuit 373A. The power-off signal is output via the output circuit 373B and input to the game control microcomputer 560 via the input circuit 68. The prize ball number command is output from the serial circuit 505 built in the game control microcomputer 560 and is input to the serial circuit 375 built in the payout control microcomputer 370. The award ACK command is output from the serial circuit 375 built in the payout control microcomputer 370 and input to the serial circuit 505 built in the game control microcomputer 560.

  Each of the connection confirmation signal and the power-off signal is 1-bit data and is transmitted through one signal line. Also, between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37, the signal line for the power-off signal to the game control microcomputer 560 and the signal line for the control signal (connection confirmation signal) related to the payout control are wired together. can do. Therefore, in the gaming machine, the wiring space related to the power-off signal to the gaming control microcomputer 560 can be saved.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 serially transmits a prize ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 370, and the payout control microcomputer 370 sends a prize ball ACK command to the game control microcomputer 560. Although the case of performing bidirectional communication for serial transmission will be described, the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370 may perform one-way serial communication. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may perform one-way serial communication in which a prize ball number command is sent to the payout control microcomputer 370, and the payout control microcomputer 370 may not send a prize ball ACK command. .

  FIG. 71 is a timing chart showing an example of how to output a payout control signal and a payout control command. As shown in FIG. 71, when the winning detection switch detects a winning of a game ball, the game control means (game controlling microcomputer 560) pays out a winning ball number command corresponding to the number of winning balls paid out in accordance with the winning. This is transmitted to the control means (dispensing control microcomputer 370). Specifically, when the gaming control microcomputer 560 detects that a game ball has won a winning area provided in the gaming machine by a detection signal of the winning detection switch, the gaming control microcomputer 560 calculates a predetermined number of winning balls. It is added to the content of the total number of winning balls stored in the backup RAM. When the content of the total winning ball number storage buffer becomes a non-zero value, a winning ball number command corresponding to the number of winning balls paid out in accordance with winning is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370.

  In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the start port switch 14a, four prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball is detected by any of the prize port switches 33a, 39a, 29a, 30a. Seven prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, 15 prize balls are paid out. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the number of prize balls is four when the number of prize balls is four according to the number of prize balls to be paid out. When the number of prize balls is 7, a prize ball number command “07” indicating that the number of prize balls is 7, and the number of prize balls is 15 when the number of prize balls is 15. A prize ball number command “0F” indicating 15 is transmitted.

  When the transmission of the winning ball number command is completed, the serial communication circuit 505 of the game control microcomputer 560 makes an interrupt request during transmission to the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560, as shown in FIG. Due to the transmission interrupt request, the CPU 56 recognizes that the transmission of the award ball number command has been completed, and waits for a reception confirmation signal from the payout control microcomputer.

  When the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms reception of the prize ball number command, it stores the number of prize balls indicated in the received prize ball number command in the reception buffer of the payout control microcomputer 370. Also, the payout control microcomputer 370 adds the number of prize balls to a prize ball non-payout number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM. Then, the payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a prize ball ACK command “D2” to the game control microcomputer 560. The payout control microcomputer 370 may store the number of prize balls in the reception counter in the interrupt process based on the interrupt request at the time of reception from the serial communication circuit 375 built in the payout control microcomputer 370. In this case, when the serial communication circuit 375 built in the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the prize ball number command, the serial communication circuit 375 makes an interrupt request during reception to the CPU of the payout control microcomputer 370. Then, the CPU of the payout control microcomputer 370 stores the prize ball number in the reception buffer by executing an interrupt process in response to an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 375.

  When the prize ball ACK command is received and the prize data ACK command is stored in the reception data register 711, the serial communication circuit 505 of the game control microcomputer 560, as shown in FIG. A reception interrupt request is made to the CPU 56 of 560. The CPU 56 recognizes that the serial communication circuit 505 has received the data by executing the interrupt process by the interrupt request at the time of reception, and receives a prize ball ACK command from the reception data register 711 in the prize ball ACK wait process described later. Read.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball processing in step S31. In the prize ball process, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a prize ball number addition process (step S1201) and a prize ball control process (step S1202). Then, the contents of the port 0 buffer formed in the RAM 55 are output to port 0 (step S1203). The contents of the port 0 buffer are updated in the prize ball control process.

  In the loop process from step S17 to step S19 in the main process, if there is an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 during the interrupt enabled state, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 causes the serial communication circuit 505 to generate an interrupt request. Execute interrupt processing according to the cause of the interrupt. FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating an example of interrupt processing that the serial communication circuit 505 performs in response to an interrupt request. FIG. 73A shows a communication error interrupt process executed by the CPU 56 when the serial communication circuit 505 makes an interrupt request with a communication error as an interrupt cause. FIG. 73 (b) shows a reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 56 when an interrupt request is issued with the serial communication circuit 505 receiving reception data as an interrupt cause. FIG. 73 (c) shows a transmission completion interrupt process executed by the CPU 56 when an interrupt request is issued with the interruption caused by the serial communication circuit 505 completing transmission of transmission data.

  The CPU 56 determines whether or not any interrupt process is preferentially executed. For example, the CPU 56 determines whether or not any interrupt process is preferentially executed. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 gives priority to an interrupt process that causes the occurrence of a communication error in the serial communication circuit 505 based on the fact that the communication error interrupt priority execution flag is set. And execute.

  When there is an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 checks each bit of the status register A 705 of the serial communication circuit 505 to identify the cause of the interrupt. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not any interrupt process is preferentially executed. For example, the CPU 56 determines whether or not any interrupt process is preferentially executed. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 gives priority to an interrupt process that causes the occurrence of a communication error in the serial communication circuit 505 based on the fact that the communication error interrupt priority execution flag is set. And execute.

  The CPU 56 preferentially checks bit 0 to bit 3 of the status register A705 based on the fact that the communication error interrupt priority execution flag is set, and identifies the cause of the interrupt. That is, the CPU 56 determines whether another interrupt cause (reception of received data has been received) as to whether or not an interrupt request has occurred due to the occurrence of a communication error (overrun, noise error, framing error or parity error) in the serial communication circuit 505. Or, determination is performed with priority over transmission data transmission completion). If the CPU 56 determines that one or more of the bits 0 to 3 of the status register A 705 is “1”, the CPU 56 specifies that the cause of the interruption is that a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505. To do.

  When the CPU 56 determines that the cause of the interruption is that a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 changes the communication error interrupt processing shown in FIG. 73A to another interrupt processing (FIG. 73B and FIG. It is executed with priority over the interrupt processing shown in (c). In this case, the CPU 56 sets a communication error flag indicating that a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505 (step S41).

  When a communication error is detected, the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command (communication error display command) for designating the occurrence of communication error in order to notify the effect control means that a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505. Perform the process. When receiving the communication error display command, the effect control CPU performs an effect using sound, display, light emitter, etc., and notifies that a communication error has occurred.

  If the cause of the interruption is not the occurrence of a communication error in the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 checks bit 5 of the status register A. That is, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the cause of the interrupt is that the serial communication circuit 505 has received the received data. When determining that the bit 5 of the status register A is “1”, the CPU 56 specifies that the cause of the interruption is that the serial communication circuit 505 has received the reception data.

  If it is determined that the cause of the interruption is that the serial communication circuit 505 has received the received data, the CPU 56 executes a reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 73 (b). In this case, the CPU 56 sets a reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 505 is receiving reception data (step S42).

  In step S42, the CPU 56 may set a reception interrupt flag and read data from the reception data register 711 of the serial communication circuit 505. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the read received data is a prize ball ACK command. If it is determined that the prize ball ACK command is received, the CPU 56 sets a prize ball ACK reception flag indicating that the prize ball ACK command has been received.

  If the cause of the interruption is not a communication error occurring in the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 confirms bit 6 of the status register A. That is, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the cause of the interrupt is that the serial communication circuit 505 has completed transmission of transmission data. When determining that the bit 6 of the status register A is “1”, the CPU 56 specifies that the cause of the interruption is that the serial communication circuit 505 has completed transmission of transmission data.

  If it is determined that the cause of the interruption is that the serial communication circuit 505 has completed transmission of transmission data, the CPU 56 executes a transmission completion interrupt process shown in FIG. In this case, the CPU 56 sets a transmission interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 505 has completed transmission of transmission data (step S43).

  By executing the processing described above, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 identifies an interrupt cause when an interrupt request is received from the serial communication circuit 505, and a flag corresponding to the identified interrupt cause. (Communication error flag, reception interrupt flag or transmission interrupt flag) is set. When the flag is set according to the specified interrupt cause, the CPU 56 recognizes that a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505, that data has been received, or that data transmission has been completed.

  Note that the CPU mounted on the payout control microcomputer 370 also identifies the cause of the interrupt according to the same process as the process shown in FIG. Set the flag according to.

  For example, consider a case where a prize ball number command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the payout control microcomputer 370 by one-way communication. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to generate a timer interrupt to the payout control microcomputer 370, for example, every 2 ms. After the prize ball number command is transmitted, the next interrupt process is performed. Assume that the award ball number command is transmitted again after 2 ms. The payout control microcomputer 370 is configured to generate a timer interrupt every 4 ms, for example, and can receive a prize ball number command every 4 ms. Then, even though the game control microcomputer 560 has not read the first prize ball number command transmitted, the payout control microcomputer 370 may receive the next prize ball number command. If the CPU of the payout control microcomputer 370 is set to receive the award ball number command in response to the interrupt request at the time of reception from the serial communication circuit 375, the award ball number command from the game control microcomputer 560 is surely received. Can be received.

  In the winning ball number adding process, a winning ball number table shown in FIG. 74 is used. The prize ball number table is set in the ROM 54. The number of processes (in this example, “6”) is set in the first address of the winning ball number table, and then the lower address of the switch-on buffer (the one corresponding to input port 0 of the 2-byte switch-on buffer) The switch input bit determination value and the number of winning balls for each switch of the winning opening that will pay out the winning ball by winning are sequentially set corresponding to each of the switches of the winning opening. The switch input bit determination value is a value corresponding to a bit to which the detection signal of each switch at the input port 0 is input. The upper address of the switch-on buffer is a fixed value (for example, 7F (H)). In the prize ball number table, the same data is set in each of the lower addresses of the six switch-on buffers. In this embodiment, the addresses of the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are designated by 16 bits.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number adding process. In the winning ball number adding process, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the winning ball number table in the pointer (step S1211). Then, the data at the address pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the number of processes) is loaded (step S1212). Next, the upper address (8 bits) of the switch-on buffer is set in the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte check pointer (step S1213).

  Then, the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S1214), the prize ball number table data pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the lower address of the switch-on buffer) is set in the lower 1 byte of the check pointer (step S1215), The pointer value is incremented by 1 (step S1216). Next, the address data pointed to by the check pointer, that is, the contents of the switch-on buffer is loaded into the register (step S1217), and the loaded contents and the data of the prize ball number table pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the switch input bit judgment value) ) And the logical product (step S1218). As a result, 7 bits other than the bit corresponding to the detection signal of the switch to be inspected become 0 in the register loaded with the contents of the switch-on buffer. Then, the pointer value is increased by 1 (step S1219).

  If the calculation result in step S1218 is 0, that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is on, the prize ball number table data pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the number of prize balls) is the prize ball addition value. (Steps S1220 and S1221), and the prize-ball addition value is added to the contents of the 16-bit total prize-ball number storage buffer formed in the RAM 55 (step S1222). If a carry occurs as a result of the addition, the content of the total number of winning balls storage buffer is set to 65535 (= FFFF (H)) (steps S1223 and 1224).

  In step S1225, the number of processes is reduced by 1. If the number of processes is 0, the process ends. If the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to step S1214 (step S1226). In step S1220, when it is confirmed that the calculation result in step S1218 is 0, that is, the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is in an OFF state, the process proceeds to step S1225.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the prize ball control processing in step S1202. In the prize ball control process, after executing the prize ball abnormality detection process of step S1230, the CPU 56 executes any one of steps S1231 to S1235 according to the value of the prize ball process code.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a prize ball transmission waiting process (step S1231) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is zero. In the award ball transmission waiting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a communication error flag is set (step S1241). That is, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505. When the communication error flag is set, the CPU 56 ends the process as it is. That is, since a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 controls to prohibit communication with the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37.

  If the communication error flag is not set, the CPU 56 confirms the contents of the total winning ball number storage buffer (step S1242). If the value is 0, the process ends. If not, the prize ball process code value is set to 1 (step S1243), and the process ends.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a prize ball number command transmission process (step S1232) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 1. The CPU 56 checks whether or not a communication error flag is set in the prize ball transmission process (step S1251). That is, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505. When the communication error flag is set, the CPU 56 prohibits communication with the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 and ends the process as it is. That is, since a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 controls to prohibit communication with the payout control microcomputer 370. In this case, the CPU 56 controls the data transmission to the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 by, for example, stopping the function of the transmission unit of the serial communication circuit 505. For example, the CPU 56 prohibits data transmission to the payout control microcomputer 370 by setting bit 3 of the control register B 708 of the serial communication circuit 505 to “0” and not using the transmission circuit. For example, the CPU 56 sets bit 3 of the control register B 708 to “0” in the communication error interrupt process shown in FIG. 73A, and prohibits data transmission to the payout control microcomputer 370. Good.

  If the communication error flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is smaller than the prize ball command maximum value (“15” in this example) (step S1252). If the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is equal to or greater than the prize ball command maximum value, the prize ball command maximum value is set in the prize ball number buffer (step S1253). If the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is smaller than the maximum value of the prize ball command, the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is set in the prize ball number buffer (step S1254).

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 writes the contents of the prize ball number buffer as a prize ball number command in the transmission data register 710 of the serial communication circuit 505 (step S1255), sets the value of the prize ball process code to 2 (step S1256), and performs processing. Exit. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the prize ball command is “15”. Therefore, a prize ball number command for designating the maximum number of payouts of “15” is written in the transmission data register 710. Thereafter, the award ball number command written in the transmission data register 710 is transferred to the transmission shift register 712 and transmitted from the transmission shift register 712 to the payout control microcomputer.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a prize ball transmission completion waiting process (step S1233) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 2. In the award ball transmission completion waiting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a communication error flag is set (step S1261). That is, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505. When the communication error flag is set, the CPU 56 ends the process as it is. That is, since a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 controls to prohibit communication with the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37.

  If the communication error flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the transmission interrupt flag is set (step S1262). If the transmission interrupt flag is set, the CPU 56 proceeds to the process of step S1263. If the transmission interrupt flag is not set, the CPU 56 ends the process as it is. That is, the CPU 56 determines whether the serial communication circuit 505 has already completed transmission of the prize ball number command written in the transmission data register 710 in the prize ball number command transmission process, and has completed transmission of the prize ball number command. If this is confirmed, the process after step S1263 is performed.

  If the transmission interrupt flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the transmission interrupt flag (step S1263). Then, the CPU 56 subtracts the contents of the prize ball number buffer (the number of prize balls paid out to the payout control means) from the contents of the total prize ball number storage buffer (step S1264). Note that the game control microcomputer 560 may subtract the number of prize balls to be paid out from the contents of the total prize ball number storage buffer before writing the prize ball number command to the transmission data register 710 in step S1255.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets an ACK reception completion determination time value in the prize ball timer (step S1266). Then, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 3 (step S1267), and the process is terminated. The ACK reception completion determination time value is a time value for monitoring whether or not a prize ball ACK command is received from the payout control means.

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a prize ball ACK waiting process (step S1234) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 3. In the award ball ACK waiting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a communication error flag is set (step S1271). That is, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505. When the communication error flag is set, the CPU 56 prohibits communication with the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 and ends the process as it is. That is, since a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 controls to prohibit communication with the payout control microcomputer 370. In this case, the CPU 56 controls the reception of data from the payout control board 37 by prohibiting the function of the receiving unit of the serial communication circuit 505, for example. For example, the CPU 56 sets the bit 2 of the control register B 708 of the serial communication circuit 505 to “0” and sets the reception circuit not to be used, so that the payout control microcomputer 37 mounted on the payout control board 37 Data reception is prohibited. For example, even if the CPU 56 sets bit 2 of the control register B 708 to “0” in the communication error interrupt processing shown in FIG. 73A, the CPU 56 prohibits data reception from the payout control microcomputer 370. Good.

  If the communication error flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the reception interrupt flag is set (step S1272). That is, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the serial communication circuit 505 receives the received data and the received data register 711 stores the data. If the reception interrupt flag is set, the CPU 56 proceeds to the process of step S1273. On the other hand, if the reception interrupt flag is not set, the CPU 56 proceeds to the process of step S1275.

  If the reception interrupt flag is set, the CPU 56 reads data from the reception data register 711 of the serial communication circuit 505 (step S1273). Further, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the read data is a prize ball ACK command (whether or not it is a command “D2”) (step S1274).

  In the reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 73 (b), when the reception interrupt flag is set and the reception data has already been read from the reception data register 711, the CPU 56 determines that a prize ball is received in steps S1273 and S1274. It may be determined whether or not an ACK reception flag is set. When the prize ball ACK reception flag is set, the CPU 56 may determine that the prize ball ACK command has been received.

  If the reception interrupt flag is not set in step S1272, or if the data read in step S1274 is not a prize ball ACK command, the CPU 56 still receives a prize ball ACK command from the payout control microcomputer 370. Judge that it is not in the state. In this case, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the prize ball timer by 1 (step S1275), and ends the process if the value is not 0 (step S1276). When the value of the prize ball timer reaches 0, it is determined that the payout control microcomputer 370 has not transmitted the prize ball ACK command, a retransmission flag is set (step S1277), and the value of the prize ball process code is set to 4. (Step S1278), and the process ends. When the value of the prize ball process code becomes 4, the prize ball re-transmission process (step S1235) is executed. When the retransmission flag is set, a payout abnormality notification start command is transmitted to the effect control board 80 in the prize ball abnormality detection process (step S1230).

  In step S1274, when confirming that the data read from the reception data register 711 is a prize ball ACK command, the CPU 56 resets the reception interrupt flag (step S1279), and sets the value of the prize ball process code to 0. (Step S1280). If the retransmission flag is set because the communication is normally completed, the retransmission flag is reset (steps S1281 and S1282).

  Through the above processing, the game control means stores the total number of game balls as prize balls to be paid out based on the establishment of the payout condition in the total prize ball number storage buffer so as to be specified. The game control means also issues a payout command command (award ball number command) for designating a payout number of a predetermined number of prize balls to the payout control means based on the number of prize balls stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer. Send. Here, the predetermined number is 15 if the number of prize balls stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer is 15 or more, and is stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer if it is less than 15. The number of prize balls. Then, when a prize ball number command designating the prize ball payout is transmitted, a subtraction process is performed to subtract the payout number designated by the prize ball number command from the prize ball number stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer. Since the payout control microcomputer 370 transmits a prize ball ACK command immediately after receiving the prize ball number command, communication regarding the prize ball number command can be completed regardless of the prize ball payout from the ball payout device 97. The control microcomputer 560 can continuously transmit the next award ball number command before the payout of the number of payouts designated by the award ball number command is completed.

  In this embodiment, in order to store the total number of premium game media to be paid out based on the establishment of the payout conditions in an identifiable manner, the total prize ball number storage buffer for storing the total number itself is used as an example. The number of winnings in each winning area is stored, or the number of winnings for each winning area having the same number of winning balls (for example, winning mouth 14 corresponding to 4 winning balls, winning corresponding to 7 winning balls) It is possible to use a buffer or the like for storing the number of winnings in the big winning opening corresponding to the number of mouths 33, 39, 29, 30 and 15 and the number of winnings not yet finished). Good. In that case, a prize ball number command in which a number corresponding to the number of prize balls for each winning area is set is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the payout control microcomputer 370. Further, instead of transmitting a winning ball number command indicating the number of winning balls, a game command microcomputer 560 transmits a payout command command indicating that there has been a winning or a winning number to the payout control microcomputer 370. It may be.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a prize ball re-transmission process (step S1235) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 4. The CPU 56 checks whether or not the communication error flag is set in the winning ball re-transmission process (step S1291). That is, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505. When the communication error flag is set, the CPU 56 prohibits communication with the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 and ends the process as it is. That is, since a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 controls to prohibit communication with the payout control microcomputer 370. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 controls to prohibit data transmission to the payout control microcomputer 370 by stopping the function of the transmission unit of the serial communication circuit 505. For example, the CPU 56 prohibits data transmission to the payout control microcomputer 370 by setting bit 3 of the control register B 708 of the serial communication circuit 505 to “0” and not using the transmission circuit.

  If the communication error flag is not set, the CPU 56 rewrites the contents of the prize ball number buffer in the transmission data register 710 of the serial communication circuit 505 as a prize ball number command (step S1292). Further, the CPU 56 sets the ACK reception completion determination time value again in the prize ball timer (step S1293). Then, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 3 (step S1294), and the process ends.

  Since the value of the prize ball process code is set to 3, the prize ball ACK waiting process is executed again. In the award ball ACK waiting process to be executed again, if it is not detected that the award ball ACK command has been received again, specifically, if the award ball timer times out in step S1276, the award ball again A retransmission process is executed. As described above, when the game control microcomputer 560 cannot receive the winning ball ACK command as the reception confirmation signal indicating that the payout amount data has been received, the winning ball number command is received until the winning ball ACK command can be received. Repeat retransmissions.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the prize ball abnormality detection processing in step S230. In the prize ball abnormality detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the re-transmission flag has changed from the reset state to the set state, the CPU 56 uses the payout abnormality notification start command as an effect control command (specifically, the effect control board 80). Transmission control is performed (to the control microcomputer 100) (steps S1301 and S1302). The CPU 56 does not transmit the payout abnormality notification start command after executing the prize ball retransmitting process, but transmits the payout abnormality notification start command to the effect control board 80 and then executes the prize ball retransmitting process. It may be.

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM 54) corresponding to the type of the effect control command as a pointer. To do. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the decorative symbol command control process (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 detects that the re-transmission flag is changed from the set state to the reset state (therefore, it is detected only when the reset state is first set when the set state continues). Then, control is performed to transmit a payout abnormality notification end command to the effect control board 80 (specifically, to the effect control microcomputer 100) (steps S1303 and S1304).

  In this embodiment, when the retransmission flag is reset, the CPU 56 transmits a payout abnormality notification end command in step S1304, but may be configured not to transmit it. In this case, the burden on the game control microcomputer 560 is reduced. In that case, the production control microcomputer 100 is configured to terminate the payout abnormality notification independently after a predetermined time, for example.

  Next, an operation in which the payout control microcomputer 370 transmits and receives various commands will be described. As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control microcomputer 370 includes a serial communication circuit 375 for serially communicating various commands with the game control microcomputer 560. The payout control microcomputer 370 uses the serial communication circuit 375 to receive the prize ball number command shown in FIG. 69 from the game control microcomputer 560. When receiving the prize ball number command, the payout control microcomputer 370 uses the serial communication circuit 375 to transmit a prize ball ACK command “D2” shown in FIG. 69 as a reception confirmation signal.

  Similarly to the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560, if the CPU of the payout control microcomputer 370 receives an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 375 while it is in the interrupt enabled state, the serial communication circuit 375 Execute interrupt processing according to the cause of the interrupt. In this embodiment, when the CPU of the payout control microcomputer 370 specifies that the cause of the interruption is that the serial communication circuit 375 has received the received data, the reception interrupt is performed according to the same process as in FIG. Execute the process. In this case, the CPU of the payout control microcomputer 370 sets a reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 375 is receiving reception data.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing main control communication processing in which the CPU of the payout control microcomputer 370 communicates with the game control means (game control microcomputer 560) of the main board 31. In the main control communication process, the CPU of the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms whether or not the connection confirmation signal is on (step S541). Note that the connection confirmation signal being in the on state means that power is supplied and the game control means can control the progress of the game, and that the connection confirmation signal is in the off state means This means that the supply stop process is started and the game control means cannot progress the game (the connection confirmation signal is turned off by the output port clear process in the power supply stop process).

  The CPU of the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms whether or not the reception interrupt flag is set (step S542). That is, the CPU of the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms whether or not the serial communication circuit 375 receives the received data and the data is stored in the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 375.

  If the reception interrupt flag is set, the CPU of the payout control microcomputer 370 reads data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 375 (step S543). Further, the CPU of the payout control microcomputer 370 determines whether or not the read data is a prize ball number command (whether the command is “04”, “07” or “0F”). (Step S544).

  When it is confirmed that the data read from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 375 is a prize ball number command, the CPU of the payout control microcomputer 370 resets the reception interrupt flag (step S545), and the prize ball The number of winning balls indicated by the number command is added to the winning ball unpaid number counter (step S546). Then, the CPU of the payout control microcomputer 370 writes the prize ball ACK command to the transmission data register 710 of the serial communication circuit 505 (step S547) and ends the process. Thereafter, the winning ball ACK command written in the transmission data register is transferred to the transmission shift register of the serial communication circuit 375 and is transmitted from the transmission shift register of the serial communication circuit 375 to the game control microcomputer 560.

  Next, a method for sending a control command from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84, in this embodiment, the effect control command (specifically, the effect control signal constituting the effect control command) has a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification). The second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used. In this embodiment, each effect control command shown in FIG. 53 is transmitted according to the sending method shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the 8-bit effect control signal of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process. Therefore, when viewed from the effect control means, the effect control INT signal corresponds to a capture signal that triggers the capture of the effect control signal.

  The effect control command is sent only once so that the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize it. In this example, “recognizable” means that the level of the effect control INT signal changes, and that it is sent only once so as to be recognizable, for example, in accordance with the first and second bytes of the effect control signal. The effect control INT signal is output in a pulse shape (rectangular wave shape) only once. The effect control INT signal may have a polarity opposite to that shown in FIG.

  Next, the operation of the production control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the production control microcomputer 100. When power supply to the gaming machine is started and the reset signal becomes high level, the effect control microcomputer 100 starts main processing. In the main process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first performs an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing a timer for determining the start interval of effect control, and the like ( Step S771). Thereafter, the effect control microcomputer 100 proceeds to a loop process for confirming the monitoring of the timer interrupt flag (step S772). When the timer interruption occurs, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a timer interruption flag in the timer interruption process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the production control microcomputer 100 clears the flag (step S773) and executes the following production control process.

  A timer interrupt takes, for example, every 2 ms. That is, the effect control process is activated, for example, every 2 ms. In this embodiment, only the flag is set in the timer interrupt process, and the specific effect control process is executed in the main process, but the effect control process may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first analyzes the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S774). Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs effect control process processing (step S775). In the effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the variable display device 9 is executed. Further, a data input process for inputting the operation signal from the operation switch 81 and the detection signals from the sensors 154 and 155 through the input port 106 is executed (step S777). And the process which updates a random number counter is performed (step S778). In addition, a notification process is performed based on an effect control command related to an error notification from the game control microcomputer 560 (step S779). Thereafter, the process returns to the process of checking the timer interrupt flag in step S772.

  An INT signal for effect control from the main board 31 is input to an interrupt terminal of the effect control microcomputer 100. For example, when the INT signal from the main board 31 is turned on, the production control microcomputer 100 is interrupted. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes effect control command reception processing in the interrupt processing. In the reception process of the effect control command, the effect control microcomputer 100 stores the received effect control command data in the command reception buffer.

  Here, the process data set for each variation pattern will be described. The process data is composed of data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of process timer set values and presentation control execution data. The effect control execution data includes display control execution data and lamp control execution data. In the display control execution data, data indicating the display state of the variable display device 9 during the symbol variation period is set. The lamp control execution data is set with data indicating the lamp display state during the symbol variation period. When the timing for switching the display state (for example, the timing at which a new character appears on the variable display device 9 or the timing at which the lamp is switched from the lighting state to the extinguishing state) arrives during the symbol variation period, the effect control means The display state of the variable display device 9 and the lamp is controlled according to the next effect control execution data in the data. In the process timer set value, a time corresponding to the switching timing is set.

  The process data is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The process data is prepared for each of the symbol variation patterns. In this way, the effect control means controls the effect means based on the program and process data stored in the ROM, and controls a plurality of effect means (the variable display device 9 and the lamp in this embodiment). The related program is stored in the ROM mounted on the effect control board 80. And ROM which stores those programs can be comprised as one ROM.

FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number used in the effect control process. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Decide whether or not to change the effect mode (for effect change determination). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a game effect is performed in different effect modes depending on the type of the current game state. Specifically, a game effect is performed in different effect modes according to whether or not the game state is a high base state. Further, when the gaming state changes at the time of the big hit, for example, based on the specific big hit end display command received from the main board 31, the production mode for performing the game production is changed. In this case, if it is determined to change the effect mode by determination using random 1, the effect mode is changed regardless of the current game state, and the game effect is performed in the changed effect mode. The effect control means determines to change the effect mode when, for example, random 1 matches a predetermined value.
(2) Random 2: When changing the production mode, decide which production mode to change to (after the change production decision)

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing (step S774). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 100 checks the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S7611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control microcomputer 100 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S7612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 1 (step S7613).

  If the received effect control command is an effect control command for designating a variation pattern (step S7614), the effect control microcomputer 100 stores the EXT data of the command in the variation pattern data storage area (step S7615). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received.

  If the effect control command confirmed to be received in step S7611 is an effect control command with display result designation (step S7616), the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the EXT data of the command as the display result (special). It is stored in the display result storage area as a symbol display result (step S7617). In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 receives display result designation commands for designating the three left and right decorative symbols. In step S7616, when the display control designation microcomputer 100 receives the display result designation command for designating all the left and right decorative symbols, the display control designation microcomputer 100 sets a display result designation command reception flag indicating that the display result designation command has been received. .

  If the effect control command confirmed to have been received in step S7611 is the specific jackpot end display command (step S7616a), the effect control microcomputer 100 presents the current jackpot end display command based on the received specific jackpot end display command. Is determined (step S7616b). In this case, when the received command is B500 (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the gaming state is the probability change state and the high base state. Further, when the received command is B501 (H), it is determined that the gaming state is a probability change state. When the received command is B502 (H), it is determined that the gaming state is the high base state.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 changes the effect according to the determined gaming state (step S7616c). In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the background color displayed on the variable display device 9 between the case where the gaming state is the high base state and the case where the gaming state is the low base state, thereby Notify the game state. For example, if the effect control computer 100 determines in step S7616b that the gaming state is the high base state, the display control execution data corresponding to the high base state is selected from the ROM, and based on the selected display control execution data. Then, the background color displayed on the variable display device is changed (for example, changed from green to blue) to notify that the high base state has been changed.

  When the received command read in step S7612 is another effect control command (for example, a normal display designation command or a non-specific big hit end display command), the effect control microcomputer 100 receives a command reception flag corresponding to the received command. Is set, and if necessary, the received command is saved (step S7618).

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S775) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes one of steps S1800 to S1806 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Ornamental symbol normal processing (step S1800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command and a display result designation command are received. If the variation pattern command and the display result designation command have been received, the effect control microcomputer 100 changes the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process.

  Decoration symbol variation start processing (step S1802): A combination of stop symbols of ornament symbols to be actually used is specified from a plurality of variation patterns of ornament symbols determined according to the variation pattern command. In addition, the variation time of the decorative design in the variable display device 9 is specified. In this case, when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is a reach / offset symbol, the symbol deviation number is specified from the display result designation command, and the specified symbol deviation number and the basic time indicated in the variation pattern command are determined. First, the variation time of the decorative pattern in the variable display device 9 is specified. Further, the variation pattern corresponding to the identified variation time is identified as the variation pattern that is actually used. Also. The variation of the decorative symbol (left middle right symbol) in the variable display device 9 is started. Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to step S1803.

  Symbol variation processing (step S1803): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed, etc.) constituting the variation pattern, and monitors the end of the variation time. Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to step S1804.

  Decoration symbol stop process (step S1804): When the variation time has elapsed, control is performed to stop the variation of the middle symbol and display the stop symbol (determined symbol). Thereafter, in the case of a big hit, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to step S1805. Otherwise, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to step S1800.

  Big hit display processing (step S1805): After the end of the variation time, the control of the probability variation big hit display or the normal big hit display is performed. Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to step S1806.

  Big hit game processing (step S1806): Control during the big hit game is performed. For example, when an effect control command for display before opening the big winning opening or display when opening the big winning opening is received, display control of the number of rounds is performed. Further, when the big hit game is finished, a predetermined ending display indicating that the big hit game is finished is performed. Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to step S1800.

  In this embodiment, when the big hit game is ended, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the variable display device 9 in different display modes depending on whether the game state is in the probability variation state or in the non-probability variation state. Ending display. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 performs ending display using different backgrounds and characters depending on whether or not the state is in the probability variation state and the non-probability variation state. The effect control microcomputer 100 may determine whether or not to change the ending display to be displayed when the big hit game is ended based on a predetermined display change determination random number. In this case, for example, when it is determined that the ending display is to be changed when the gaming state is the probability variation state, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the ending display originally used in the non-probability variation state when the big hit game is terminated. For example, when it is determined that the ending display is changed when the gaming state is the non-probability change state, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the ending display originally used in the probability change state when the big hit game is finished. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the gaming state is a promiscuous state when the big hit game is finished, and to enhance the interest in the game.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform the ending display using the variable display device 9 in different display modes depending on whether the gaming state is a high-base state in addition to whether the gaming state is a probability change state or not. Good. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 has different backgrounds and characters in the probability variation state and high base state, the probability variation state and low base state, the non-probability variation state and high base state, and the non-probability variation state and low base state. The used ending display may be performed. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 may determine whether or not to change the ending display to be displayed when the big hit game is ended based on a predetermined display change determination random number. In this case, for example, when it is determined that the ending display is to be changed when the gaming state is the high base state and the probability variation state, when the big hit game is finished, the effect control microcomputer 100 originally has the high base state and the non-probability variation state. Use the ending display. Further, for example, when it is determined that the ending display is to be changed when the gaming state is the high base state and the non-probability change state, the effect control microcomputer 100 originally uses the high base state and the probability change state when the big hit game ends. Display ending.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 may perform the ending display using the variable display device 9 in the same display mode regardless of whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state. The effect control microcomputer 100 may change the background displayed on the variable display device 9 between the probability change state and the non-probability change state after the end display. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may determine whether or not to change the background of the variable display device 9 after the ending display is ended, based on a predetermined background change determination random number. In this case, for example, when it is determined that the background is changed when the gaming state is the probability change state, the effect control microcomputer 100 changes to the background originally used in the non-probability change state when the ending display is finished. For example, when it is determined that the background is changed when the gaming state is the non-probability change state, the effect control microcomputer 100 changes to the background originally used in the probability change state when the ending display ends. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 performs ending display using the variable display device 9 in different display modes in the probability variation state and the non-probability variation state, and whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state after the ending display ends. Regardless, the same background may be displayed on the variable display device 9.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a decorative design normal process (step S1800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the decorative pattern normal process, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S1812). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set when it is determined as Y in step S7614, that is, when a fluctuation pattern command is received.

  If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the variation pattern command reception flag and checks whether or not the display result designation command reception flag is set (step S1813). The display result designation command reception flag is set when it is determined in step S7616 that the display result designation command for designating all the decorative symbols on the left middle right has been received.

  If the display result designation command reception flag is set, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the display result designation command reception flag and changes the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the decorative pattern variation pattern determination process. (Step S1814).

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (step S1802) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control microcomputer 100 specifies a display result based on the received display result designation command (step S1861). In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 specifies the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the display result designation command (commands 91XX (H) to 93XX (H) shown in FIG. 53).

  A combination of symbols in the case where the stop symbol of the specified decorative symbol is not a big hit after reaching the reach mode (for example, a combination of symbols different in the “middle” symbol among the three symbols “left middle right”. Reach / offset (Also referred to as a symbol) (step S1862), the production control microcomputer 100 specifies the number of deviations of the off symbol based on the specified stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step S1863). For example, when the stop symbol of the specified decorative design is “767”, the effect control microcomputer 100 specifies the number of deviations “1”. For example, when the stop symbol of the specified decorative design is “757”, the production control microcomputer 100 specifies the number of deviations “2”.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the variation pattern of the decorative design based on the received variation pattern command. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 specifies the decorative symbol variation time based on the received variation pattern command and the number of deviation symbols identified in step S1863 (step S1864). In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 uses a reach / displacement symbol variation pattern command (variation pattern command that is EXT data “03H” shown in FIG. 52) for a basic time of the ornament symbol of 10 seconds. (See FIG. 52). In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 specifies the time corresponding to the specified number of deviations (the time required for extra fluctuations relative to the basic time by the amount of deviation of the symbols when the decorative symbols fluctuate). For example, when the specified deviation number is “1”, the production control microcomputer 100 specifies the corresponding time as 1 second. Further, for example, when the specified deviation number is “2”, the production control microcomputer 100 specifies the corresponding time as 2 seconds. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 specifies the time obtained by adding (or subtracting) the time corresponding to the number of deviations to the specified basic time as the decorative symbol variation time. For example, when the specified deviation number is “1”, the production control microcomputer 100 specifies the variation time of the decorative symbol as 11 seconds. Further, for example, when the specified deviation number is “2”, the production control microcomputer 100 specifies the variation time of the decorative symbol as 12 seconds.

  In step S1862, if the decorative symbol stop symbol is not a reach / displacement symbol (for example, a symbol combination when the jackpot is reached after reaching the reach mode or a symbol combination that does not reach the reach mode), the production control microcomputer 100 Based on the received variation pattern command, the variation pattern of the decorative design is determined. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 specifies the variation time of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command (step S1865). In this embodiment, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the decorative symbol variation time to 8. based on the variation pattern command of normal variation (the variation pattern command which is the EXT data “00H” shown in FIG. 52). Specify 1 second (see FIG. 52). Further, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 has a decorative symbol variation time of 10 seconds based on a jackpot variation pattern command with reach (variation pattern command which is EXT data “02H” shown in FIG. 52). (See FIG. 52).

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 uniquely determines at least a part of the decorative pattern variation pattern. For example, among the variation patterns of a plurality of types of decorative symbols prepared in advance, the variation time specified in step S1864 or step S1865, the specific jackpot end display command received from the game control microcomputer 560, or the non-specific jackpot end display A variation pattern to be executed is selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns of decorative symbols that match the gaming state (probability variation state or high base state) indicated by the command. In other words, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 produces an effect of the decoration pattern (for example, which background or which character is used) according to the type of gaming state (for example, whether the state is a high base state). Or the like), the presence / absence of execution of the notice effect, and the contents of the effect, such as at least a part of the decorative pattern variation mode (effect mode) is uniquely determined.

  The production control microcomputer 100 receives a variation pattern command to which information indicating a gaming state (probability variation state or high base state) is added from the game control microcomputer 560, and changes to the gaming state indicated by the variation pattern command. A matching variation pattern may be selected. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits, to the effect control microcomputer 100, a variation pattern command (for example, a command having a different value of MODE data in the first byte) depending on the game state. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 may determine or change the effect contents by determining whether or not the gaming state has changed based on the received variation pattern command.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects display control execution data corresponding to the specified gaming state from the ROM, and performs a game effect based on the selected display control execution data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state changes to the high base state or the low base state at the time of big hit, the effect mode is changed based on the specific big hit end display command received from the main board 31. Become.

  The timing for changing the effect mode is not limited to the jackpot, and the effect control microcomputer 100 may change the effect mode by recognizing that the gaming state has changed at a timing other than the jackpot. For example, when the gaming state suddenly changes (the big hit where the probability changing state occurs, the big winning gaming state lasts only for a short period of time (for example, the number of times the big winning opening is opened twice), and the big winning opening opens only for a short time. The transition to the high base state or the low base state is triggered by the fact that the game state is controlled, and the production control microcomputer 100 recognizes the change in the gaming state (high base state or low base state) The production mode may be changed. In addition, for example, the presentation control microcomputer 100 performs the presentation in response to the occurrence of a small hit (the opening of the special variable winning device 20 is only once (that is, the continuation right is allowed only one round)). The mode may be changed. For example, when the game is suddenly changed to a certain probability or a small hit occurs, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits an effect control command for designating sudden sudden change or a small hit to the production control microcomputer 100. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits to the effect control microcomputer 100 an effect control command to which information indicating whether the current game state is the high base state or the low base state is added. . Then, based on the received effect control command, the effect control microcomputer 100 identifies sudden probability change or small hit and recognizes the change in the game state and changes the effect mode.

  In addition, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 may use a combination of predetermined symbols (so-called chance eyes) for notifying the possibility that a stop symbol of a special symbol or a decorative symbol will be a big hit or reach regardless of a change in the gaming state. The production mode may be changed on the occasion of becoming. In addition, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 may change the effect mode when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol becomes a reach / disconnect symbol regardless of a change in the gaming state. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is a combination or a reach / displace symbol of the chance symbol based on the display result designation command received from the game control microcomputer 560. Check. And if the microcomputer 100 for production control specifies that the stop symbol is a combination of symbols or a reach / disconnection symbol of chance, the production mode is set regardless of the current gaming state (high base state or low base state). change. Furthermore, when the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol, the transition to the high base state or the low base state is made, and the production control microcomputer 100 recognizes the change in the gaming state (high base state or low base state). Then, the production mode may be changed.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to change the production mode based on the production change determination random number (random 1) (step S1866). For example, when the random 1 matches a predetermined value, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines to change the effect mode regardless of the current gaming state (whether the base state is the high base state or the low base state).

  If it is determined not to change the effect mode (step S1867), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the effect mode according to the current gaming state (step S1867a). In this case, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 specifies the current gaming state (high base state or low base normal state) based on the received specific jackpot end display command and performs the effect using the variable display device 9. . For example, the production control microcomputer 100 selects display control execution data corresponding to the specified gaming state from the ROM, and changes the background color displayed on the variable display device 9 based on the selected display control execution data. The current gaming state is notified by letting go. The production control microcomputer 100 may specify the gaming state based on the received display result designation command or variation pattern command, and perform the production using the variable display device 9.

  When it is determined that the effect mode is to be changed (step S1867), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines which effect mode is to be changed based on the changed effect determination random number (random 2) (step S1868). ). In this case, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 changes the effect mode by changing the variation pattern of the decorative design used for the game effect to a variation pattern corresponding to a random value of 2. The presentation control microcomputer 100 selects, for example, display control execution data corresponding to the changed presentation mode from the ROM regardless of the current gaming state, and based on the selected display control execution data, The background color displayed on the variable display device 9 is changed.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 does not determine whether or not to change the effect by lottery based on the effect change determination random number. For example, a small hit occurs or a stop symbol is a so-called chance or reach. / It may be determined that the production is changed after recognizing that the symbol has become out of date. In this case, for example, when a small hit occurs, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits an effect control command designating the small hit to the effect control microcomputer 100. Then, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that a small hit has occurred based on the received effect control command, and changes the effect (for example, changes the background color displayed on the variable display device 9). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 changes the production (for example, changes the background color to be displayed on the variable display device 9) when the stop design of the decoration design is specified as a so-called chance or reach / displacement design. .

  In addition, a variable time timer corresponding to the decorative symbol change period is started (step S1869). The effect control microcomputer 100 reads the first effect control execution data in the process data stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80 (step S1870). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 gives an instruction to the GCL so that the variation of the left middle right decorative design is started in the variable display device 9, and starts the variable display of the decorative design. That is, in the process data, the process timer set first is started (step S1871), and the LCD control is performed based on the display control execution data set first (step S1872). Further, the lamp control is performed based on the lamp control execution data set first in the process data (step S1873). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during symbol variation (step S1874).

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the decorative symbol variation process (step S1803) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol changing process, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1841). If time-out occurs, the effect control execution data in the process data is switched (step S1842). That is, in the process data, the next set process timer is started (step S1843), and LCD control is performed based on the next set display control execution data (step S1844). Further, lamp control and sound output control are performed based on the lamp control execution data set next in the process data (step S1845).

  In this embodiment, in steps S1844 and S1845, the production control microcomputer 100 performs production control based on the display control execution data and the lamp control execution data corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the decorative symbol variation start process. Do. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects an effect mode corresponding to the current game state (high base state or low base state), and different effect modes (for example, different backgrounds or notices) for each type of game state. The game effects are performed with different effects or different effects using characters. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs a game effect using sounds, light emitters, and the like by the speaker 27 and the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c. When the effect mode is changed in the processes of steps S1866 to S1868, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the game effect in the effect mode corresponding to the changed effect mode regardless of the current game state. Do. When the production control microcomputer 100 identifies the high base state based on the specific jackpot end display command or the variation pattern command received from the game control microcomputer 560, for example, the current game state is set to the high base state. Set the high base state flag to indicate the state. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the current gaming state (whether it is the high base state) by checking whether the high base state flag is set.

  Then, when the variation time timer has timed out (step S1846), the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol stop waiting process (step S1847).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when it is decided not to make a big hit after setting the display form of the decorative design as the reach form, the production control microcomputer 100 is based on the display result designation command. Specify the number of decorative pattern shifts. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 identifies the variation time of the decorative pattern based on the identified number of deviations and the basic time indicated by the variation pattern command. Therefore, even if the game control microcomputer 560 does not transmit a stop preparation command or a confirmation command after transmitting the variation pattern command, the effect control microcomputer 100 can execute the variable display of the decorative symbols. Therefore, the number of commands for executing variable display can be reduced.

  Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to shift the game state to the probable change state based on the state determination random number (random 8) and the state determination table. In addition, a determination is made as to whether or not to shift to the high base state. Therefore, in addition to performing control to shift the gaming state to a probable state based on the establishment of a predetermined high probability condition, it is possible to perform control to transition the gaming state to a high base state based on the establishment of a high release condition. it can. Therefore, the player can recognize whether or not the current gaming state is advantageous by making the player feel a change in the rate at which the variable winning device 15 is opened.

  Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 plays a game such as when shifting only to the probability variation state (probability variation / low base state) or when transitioning to the probability variation state and transitioning to the high base state (probability variation / high base state). Control to shift the state to multiple types of states. It is configured to determine the state to shift the gaming state at different selection ratios depending on which state the current gaming state is, so the player is interested in which gaming state to transition to during the game Can be maintained, and the player's interest in games can be maintained.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state and is transitioned to the high base state (in the case of probability variation / high base state), the probability variation state and the high base state are increased at a high rate. It is determined that both transition conditions are satisfied. For example, when the state determination is performed using the probability variation / high base state determination table shown in FIG. 57, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 determines to shift again to the probability variation / high base state at a rate of 50%. Therefore, it is possible to continue (loop) at a high rate the state of shifting to the probability change / high base state, which is the most advantageous state for the player. Therefore, to increase the player's interest in the transition from the state other than the probability variation / high base state (normal / low base state, probability variation / low base state, normal / high base state) to the probability variation / high base state. Can do.

  Further, in this embodiment, based on the production data (display control execution data and lamp control execution data), the game production is performed in the production mode corresponding to the game state (probability change state or high base state) among the plurality of production modes. Do. If it is determined that the effect mode is to be changed by lottery using the effect change determination random number (random 1), the effect data used for the game effect is changed. Then, regardless of the current game state, the game effect is performed in the changed effect mode. Therefore, even if the same game state continues, the game effect can be performed by changing the effect mode. Therefore, even if the same gaming state continues, by changing the production mode, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the gaming state has been shifted, and enhance the player's interest in the game be able to.

  In this embodiment, the random number circuit 503 is initially set (random number circuit setting process) from the start of power-on to the gaming machine until the timer interrupt is set. In the random number circuit setting process, A value based on an ID number unique to the control microcomputer 560 is set as an initial value of a random number. Therefore, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be improved. In addition, since randomness of random numbers can be improved, the timing of random number generation can be made difficult to be recognized by a player or a game store, and a capture signal using a radio signal can be generated for a gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the condition for shifting to a specific gaming state such as a big hit state from being illegally established.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the serial communication circuit 505 makes an interrupt request, the interrupt process when a communication error is caused as an interrupt cause is preferentially executed to control the communication to a prohibited state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent communication with the payout control microcomputer 370 of the payout control board 37 mounted on the gaming machine in a state where a communication error has occurred. Therefore, malfunction due to a communication error can be prevented.

  For example, when an overrun occurs in the serial communication circuit 505, the next received data is stored in the receiving shift register 713 before the received data in the received data register 711 is read. It is overwritten and the CPU 56 cannot read the received data correctly. For this reason, communication with the microcomputer mounted on each control board cannot be performed correctly, causing the game control microcomputer 560 to malfunction. In this embodiment, when an overrun occurs, the serial communication circuit 505 makes an interrupt request at the time of a communication error, and the CPU 56 controls the communication to a prohibited state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming control microcomputer 560 from malfunctioning due to the occurrence of overrun.

  Further, for example, when a noise error occurs in the serial communication circuit 505, there is a high possibility that correct received data cannot be received due to the noise, which causes the CPU 56 to malfunction. In this embodiment, when a noise error occurs, the serial communication circuit 505 issues an interrupt request at the time of a communication error, and the CPU 56 controls the communication to a prohibited state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the CPU 56 from malfunctioning due to the occurrence of a noise error.

  Further, for example, when a framing error occurs in the serial communication circuit 505, it is in a state where the stop bit of the received data has not been correctly received, and therefore there is a high possibility that correct received data cannot be received, causing the CPU 56 to malfunction. . In this embodiment, when a framing error occurs, the serial communication circuit 505 issues an interrupt request at the time of a communication error, and the CPU 56 controls the communication to a prohibited state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the CPU 56 from malfunctioning due to the occurrence of a framing error.

  Further, for example, when a parity error occurs in the serial communication circuit 505, it is in a state where each data bit or parity bit of the received data has not been correctly received, so there is a high possibility that correct received data cannot be received, and the CPU 56 malfunctions. Cause. In this embodiment, when a parity error occurs, the serial communication circuit 505 makes an interrupt request at the time of a communication error, and the CPU 56 controls the communication to a prohibited state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the CPU 56 from malfunctioning due to the occurrence of a parity error.

  In this embodiment, when a communication error occurs in the serial communication circuit 505, a prize ball number command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37, and the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the command. Control is performed to prohibit the reception of a prize ball ACK command. For example, if a prize ball number command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37 when a communication error occurs, an incorrect prize ball number command may be transmitted. Therefore, an incorrect number of game balls may be paid out based on the number of prize balls indicated in the wrong prize ball number command, which may affect the game result. In this embodiment, when a communication error occurs, control is performed so as to prohibit transmission of a prize ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37, so that it is based on an erroneous prize ball command. It is possible to prevent an incorrect number of game balls from being paid out and affecting the game result.

  Note that when a communication error occurs in the serial communication circuit 505, only reception of data from a microcomputer mounted on each control board may be prevented. For example, consider a case where serial communication is performed between the game control means and the effect control means. In this case, the communication performed between the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer is only transmission of the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer. No command is transmitted from the microcomputer to the game control microcomputer 560. That is, communication in only one direction is performed between the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer. Further, even if an erroneous effect control command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control board 80, only an incorrect effect display is performed on the variable display device 9, and an incorrect payout process is executed. Compared with the case where it ends, there is little influence on a game result.

  In this embodiment, the inverting circuit 532 of the random number circuit 503 generates the inverted clock signal SI2 (or the delayed clock signal delayed by the delay circuit) whose polarity is inverted, and is synchronized with the inverted clock signal SI2. A latch signal for instructing random number storage is output. Therefore, the timing for updating the random number and the timing for storing the random number in the random value storage circuit 531 can be shifted, and the generated random number can be stored stably and reliably.

  In this embodiment, the expression “the serial communication circuit 505 issues an interrupt request to the CPU 56” is used. Specifically, when an interrupt factor such as transmission / reception of data or occurrence of a communication error occurs. In addition, the interrupt control circuit 714 of the serial communication circuit 505 sets a set value to a corresponding bit (bit corresponding to an interrupt factor) of the status register A 705 and outputs an interrupt signal (internal IRQ) to the CPU 56. An interrupt request is made by the serial communication circuit 505. For example, when a communication error occurs, the interrupt control circuit 714 of the serial communication circuit 505 sets a set value in a corresponding bit (bits 0 to 3 corresponding to the communication error) of the status register A 705 and also sends an interrupt signal to the CPU 56. Is output, the serial communication circuit 505 issues an interrupt request when a communication error occurs.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the effect control board 80 is used to control all effect means (the variable display device 9, the sound output device (speaker) 27, and the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c). However, each rendering means may be controlled using separate control boards. A second embodiment including a sound / lamp control board that controls the sound output device 27 and the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c and a symbol control board that controls the variable display device 9 will be described below.

  In the present embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 includes the serial communication circuit 505 in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and performs various controls with the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37. Commands (award ball number command and award ball ACK command) are serially communicated.

  FIG. 93 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the sound / lamp control board 80b, and the symbol control board 80a according to the second embodiment. In this embodiment, the sound / lamp control board 80b performs sound output control of the sound output device 27 and display control of each lamp 25, 28a, 28b, 28c. The symbol control board 80a performs display control of the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, “effect control” means display control of the variable display device 9, sound output control of the speaker 27, and display control of the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c. It means performing such as. In this embodiment, the effect control means includes a symbol control microcomputer 100a that performs display control of the variable display device 9, sound output control of the speaker 27, and display control of the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, and 28c. Is realized by the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b.

  The sound / lamp control board 80b is mounted with a sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b including a sound / lamp control CPU 101b and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the sound / lamp control board 80b, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and is input via the relay board 77. In response to the strobe signal (effect control INT signal) from, an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the sound / lamp control board 80b. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the sound / lamp control board 80b (passes the signal in the direction from the sound / lamp control board 80b to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as signal direction regulating means.

  A signal that allows the signal input from the main board 31 to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the sound / lamp control board 80b (does not pass the signal in the direction from the sound / lamp control board 80b to the relay board 77). A unidirectional circuit is mounted as a direction regulating means. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 93 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal.

  Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100 b outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver 352. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the button lamp 130. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side.

  Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b outputs sound number data to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesizing IC 173 generates a voice or a sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 175. The amplifier circuit 175 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 173 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 176 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 174 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are transmitted bidirectionally (a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side) between the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b, the lamp driver 352, and the voice synthesis IC 173. Communication).

  Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b determines the contents of the effect to be performed using the variable display device 9 based on the effect control command (for example, the variation pattern command). For example, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b uses the variable display device 9 to determine whether to perform a notice effect. Further, for example, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b uses the variable display device 9 to determine the type of the notice effect.

  The “notice effect” is an effect for informing the player in advance (before the decorative symbol stop symbol is derived and displayed on the variable display device 9) that it is a big hit or is likely to be a big hit. Say. For example, the player is informed that there is a possibility of a big hit by changing a different mode (speed, direction of rotation, etc.) or making a character appear during the change.

  In addition, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100 b transmits an effect control command (a variation pattern command or a display result designation command) from the main board 31 to the symbol control board 80 a via the input / output port 104. Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b generates an effect content designation command indicating the determined effect content (whether or not to perform the notice effect and the type of the notice effect). In addition, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100 b transmits the generated effect content designation command to the symbol control board 80 a via the input / output port 104.

  Note that the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b adds the determined contents (whether or not to perform the notice effect and the type of the notice effect) to the effect control command (variation pattern command or display result designation command). Also good. Then, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100 b may transmit an effect control command to which the effect content is added to the symbol control board 80 a via the input / output port 104. For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, the first 4 bits in the EXT data of each variation pattern command (8000 (H) to 8002 (H)) are all “0”. The sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b, when adding the production contents to the variation pattern command, for example, adds a value capable of specifying the decided production contents to the first 4 bits of the EXT data, You may transmit to 80a.

  The symbol control board 80a is equipped with a symbol control microcomputer 100a including a symbol control CPU 101a and RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the symbol control board 80a, the symbol control microcomputer 100a operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown). Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100a causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the variable display device 9 using the LCD based on the effect control command received from the sound / lamp control board 80b. .

  The symbol control microcomputer 100a reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM stores character image data frequently used among images displayed on the variable display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol, or the like (including decorative designs) in advance. Is. The symbol control microcomputer 100 a outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control of the variable display device 9 based on data input from the symbol control microcomputer 100a.

  In this embodiment, the VDP 109 that performs display control of the variable display device 9 is mounted on the symbol control board 80a. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the symbol control microcomputer 100a, and maps a VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the variable display device 9.

  Next, the operation of the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b according to the second embodiment. When power supply to the gaming machine is started and the reset signal becomes high level, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b starts main processing. In the main process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b first performs an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval, and the like. This is performed (step S781). Thereafter, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b shifts to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S782). When a timer interrupt occurs, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b clears the flag (step S783) and executes the following sound / lamp control process.

  A timer interrupt takes, for example, every 2 ms. That is, the sound / lamp control process is activated every 2 ms, for example. In this embodiment, only the flag is set in the timer interrupt process, and the specific sound / lamp control process is executed in the main process, but the sound / lamp control process is executed in the timer interrupt process. Also good.

  In the sound / lamp control process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b first analyzes the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S784). In this case, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b follows the same processing as the command analysis processing (command analysis processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 88) shown in the first embodiment. Analyzing the production control command.

  Next, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b performs an effect content determination process (step S785). In the effect content determination process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b uses the variable display device 9 based on the effect control command (variation pattern command or display result designation command) (whether or not to perform the notice effect). Kaya, the type of notice effect). In addition, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b generates an effect content designation command indicating the determined effect content.

  Next, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b performs sound output processing (step S786). In this case, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b outputs sound number data (for example, sound number data corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command) to the speech synthesis IC 173. Then, the voice synthesis IC 173 generates a voice or a sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 175.

  Next, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b performs lamp display processing (step S787). In this case, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b performs lamp control based on the lamp control execution data set in the process data.

  Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b executes data input processing for inputting the operation signal from the operation switch 81 and the detection signals from the sensors 154 and 155 through the input port 106 (step S788). And the process which updates a random number counter is performed (step S789). Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b performs a process of sending the effect control command received from the main board 31 and the effect content designation command generated in the effect content determination process in step S785 to the symbol control board 80a ( Command control processing: Step S790). Thereafter, the process returns to the process of checking the timer interrupt flag in step S782.

  An INT signal for effect control from the main board 31 is input to an interrupt terminal of the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b. For example, when the INT signal from the main board 31 is turned on, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b is interrupted. Then, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b executes an effect control command reception process in the interrupt process. In the effect control command reception process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b stores the received effect control command data in the command reception buffer.

  In this embodiment, the process data stored in the ROM of the sound / lamp control board 80b (hereinafter also referred to as sound / lamp control side process data) includes only the process timer set value and the lamp control execution data. It is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of production control execution data are collected. Further, the process data stored in the ROM of the symbol control board 80a (hereinafter also referred to as symbol control side process data) is a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values and presentation control execution data including only display control execution data. Consists of data.

FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number used in the sound / lamp control process in the second embodiment. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Decide whether or not to change the effect mode (for effect change determination). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a game effect is performed in different effect modes depending on the type of the current game state. Specifically, a game effect is performed in different effect modes according to whether or not the game state is a high base state. Further, when the gaming state changes at the time of the big hit, for example, based on the specific big hit end display command received from the main board 31, the production mode for performing the game production is changed. In this case, if it is determined to change the effect mode by determination using random 1, the effect mode is changed regardless of the current game state, and the game effect is performed in the changed effect mode. Note that the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b determines to change the effect mode when, for example, random 1 matches a predetermined value.
(2) Random 2: When changing the production mode, decide which production mode to change to (after the change production decision)
(3) Random 3: Decide whether or not to execute the notice effect (for determining the notice effect execution). In this embodiment, when the variable display device 9 performs variable display of the decorative pattern in the reach mode, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b matches, for example, one value in which random 3 is determined in advance. In this case, it is determined that a notice effect is to be performed. Note that the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b may determine whether or not to perform the notice effect using the random number 3 regardless of whether or not the variable display of the reach mode is performed.
(4) Random 4: When the notice effect is performed, the type of the notice effect performed using the variable display device 9 is determined (for determining the notice effect type).

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the effect content determination process (step S785) shown in FIG. In the effect content determination process, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S1851).

  If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b resets the variation pattern command reception flag and specifies the variation pattern of the decorative pattern based on the received variation pattern command. Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b determines whether or not the variable display to be executed using the variable display device 9 is a variation accompanied by reach based on the identified variation pattern (step S1852). For example, in the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b, when the variation pattern shown in the received variation pattern command is a pattern with reach (for example, the variation pattern of EXT data “03H” to “08H” shown in FIG. 52). ), The sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b determines that the fluctuation is accompanied by reach. If the variation pattern command reception flag is not set in step S1851, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b ends the process.

  If it is determined that the variation is accompanied by reach, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b determines whether or not to perform the notice effect based on the notice effect execution determination random number (random 3) (step S1853). For example, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b determines to perform a notice effect using the variable display device 9 when the random number 3 matches a predetermined value. If NO in step S1852, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b ends the process.

  If it is determined in step S1854 that the notice effect is not performed, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b receives the variation pattern command and the display when the variation pattern command is received and the display result designation command is received. The result designation command is transferred to the symbol control microcomputer 100a, and the symbol control microcomputer 100a executes variable display of decorative symbols and game effects using the variable display device 9. In this case, if the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b determines that the notice effect is not performed in step S1854, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b generates a notification command designating that the notice effect is not performed, and transmits it to the symbol control microcomputer 100a ( Step S1857).

  If it is determined that the notice effect is to be performed (step S1854), the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b determines the type of the notice effect to be performed using the variable display device 9 based on the random number for determining the notice effect type (random 4). Determination is made (step S1855). For example, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b can change the speed at which the decorative symbol is changed in the notice effect based on the random number 4, and in which rotation direction the decorative symbol is changed. 9 determines which character is to appear. If it is determined in step S1854 that the notice effect is not to be executed, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b ends the process.

  In this embodiment, a case will be described in which the effect content is determined by specifying whether or not the reach is based on the variation pattern command. However, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b is a game control microcomputer. Based on the display result designation command received from 560, it may be determined whether or not it is a reach, and the production content may be determined. Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b may determine whether or not it is reach based on both the variation pattern command and the display result designation command, and may determine the content of the effect. Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b may determine the contents of the production by specifying that the probability change big hit or the probability change big hit is based on the display result designation command. In addition, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b receives the symbol deviation number designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, and based on the received symbol deviation number designation command, is the stop symbol a symbol with a reach? The content of the production may be determined by specifying whether or not. In this case, for example, when the game control microcomputer 560 determines the stop symbol as the reach / displacement symbol when determining the stop symbol of the decoration symbol in the special symbol stop symbol setting process (see step S301), Obtain the number of stoppages of the decorative symbol. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 generates a symbol deviation number designation command including a value that can specify the obtained deviation number, and transmits the command deviation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the stop symbol is a reach / delay symbol based on the reception of the symbol deviation number command, and determines the contents of the effect.

  Furthermore, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b may determine the contents of the effect based on all the commands (the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the symbol deviation number designation command) described above. Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b determines the contents of the effect based on any two of the above-described commands (variation pattern command, display result designation command, and symbol deviation number designation command). May be.

  Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b generates an effect content designation command indicating the determined effect content (whether or not to perform the notice effect and the type of the notice effect). Then, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b performs a process of transmitting the generated effect content designation command to the symbol control board 80a (step S1856). The sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b transfers (transmits) the display result designation command and the variation pattern command received from the game control microcomputer 560 to the symbol control board 80a together with the effect content designation command. Then, the symbol control microcomputer 100a of the symbol control board 80a performs step 775 (effect control process processing) based on the effect content designation command, the display result designation command and the variation pattern command received from the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b. In accordance with the same processing as), the decorative symbols are changed and the game effects are performed. In this case, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a causes the VDP 109 to perform a notice effect using the variable display device 9 based on the received effect content designation command.

  In step S1856, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b may add the determined effect content to the variation pattern command or the display result specification command instead of generating the effect content specifying command. For example, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b adds an effect content to a variation pattern command or a display result designation command by adding a value indicating the effect content to the header portion of the command. In this case, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b may add a value indicating the effect content to the header portion of only the variation pattern command, or add a value indicating the effect content to the header portion of only the display result designation command. May be. Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b may add a value indicating the effect content to the header portions of both the variation pattern command and the display result designation command. Then, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b may perform a process of transmitting a variation pattern command and a display result designation command to which the contents of the effect are added to the symbol control board 80a. When the notice effect is not performed, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b directly transfers the variation pattern command and the display result designation command received from the game control microcomputer 560 to the symbol control microcomputer 100a. It will be.

  In this embodiment, the command for specifying the contents of the effect is performed by executing the command control process (see step S790) in the sound / lamp control main process based on the setting of the address of the transmission table in step S1856. Is transmitted to the symbol control board 80a.

  In this embodiment, the sound / lamp control side process data including the lamp control execution data is stored in the ROM of the sound / lamp control board 80b. Further, symbol control side process data including display control execution data is stored in the ROM in the symbol control board 80a. In this embodiment, in step S1856, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b transmits an effect content designation command generated according to the determined effect content to the symbol control microcomputer 100a. In this case, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b transmits an effect content designation command including a variation pattern and a variation time to the symbol control microcomputer 100a. The symbol control microcomputer 100a reads the display control execution data from the ROM based on the received effect content designation command, and performs the effect using the variable display device 9 based on the read display control execution data.

  In addition, when the effect content determined in step S1856 is added to the variation pattern command or the display result designation command, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b adds the determined effect content (for example, background color or appearing character). A variation pattern command or a display result designation command may be transmitted to the symbol control microcomputer 100a. The symbol control microcomputer 100a reads display control execution data from the ROM based on the received variation pattern command and display result designation command, and produces an effect using the variable display device 9 based on the read display control execution data. You may go.

  Further, process data including both display control execution data and lamp control execution data may be stored in the ROM of the sound / lamp control board 80b. In this case, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b may extract display control execution data corresponding to the determined effect content from the ROM, and transmit the display control execution data to the symbol control microcomputer 100a together with the generated effect content designation command. . Then, the symbol control microcomputer 100a may produce an effect using the variable display device 9 based on the received display control execution data.

  When process data including both display control execution data and lamp control execution data is stored in the ROM of the sound / lamp control board 80b, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b responds to the determined contents of the effect. The display control execution data may be extracted from the ROM and transmitted to the symbol control microcomputer 100a together with the variation pattern command and the display result designation command to which the determined production content is added. Then, the symbol control microcomputer 100a may produce an effect using the variable display device 9 based on the received display control execution data.

  Note that the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b follows the same processing as in steps S1866 and S1867, and sets the current gaming state (whether the base state is the high base state or the low base state) based on the random number for determining the effect change. Regardless, it may be determined whether or not to change the effect mode. If the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b determines to change the effect mode, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b determines which effect mode to change to based on the post-change effect determining random number according to the same processing as in step S1868. Then, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b may transmit an effect content designation command including an effect content corresponding to the changed effect mode to the symbol control microcomputer 100a.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b uniquely determines the contents of the effect (whether or not to perform the notice effect and the type of the notice effect) based on the change pattern command. decide. Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100a uses the variable display device 9 to execute a game effect according to the effect content determined by the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 does not have to determine the contents of the effects. Therefore, the processing load of the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  Although not described in detail in this embodiment, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b also specifies the variation time of the decorative symbols in addition to the effect contents. In this case, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b, for example, in accordance with the processing similar to steps S1861 to S1864 shown in the first embodiment, the number of misplaced designs (outlier design) based on the display result designation command. ). Further, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b specifies the variation time of the decorative symbol based on the basic time indicated by the variation pattern command and the specified number of deviations of the decorative symbol. Then, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b generates an effect content designation command indicating the variation time of the decorative symbol in addition to the determined effect content (whether or not to perform the notice effect and the type of the notice effect). It transmits to the symbol control board 80a. Note that the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b may generate a decorative symbol variation time designation command indicating the variation time of the decorative symbol and transmit the command to the symbol control board 80a. Further, upon receiving the effect content designation command, the symbol control microcomputer 100a on the symbol control board 80a causes the VDP 109 to execute the variable display of the decorative symbols on the variable display device 9 based on the received effect content designation command. Make a notice effect.

  In this embodiment, an effect control command from the main board 31 is first received by the sound / lamp control board 80b, and further, an effect control command and an effect content designation command are sent from the sound / lamp control board 80b to the symbol control board 80a. In the above description, the effect control command from the main board 31 may be first received by the symbol control board 80a.

  FIG. 97 is a block diagram showing another circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the sound / lamp control board 80b, and the symbol control board 80a. When the circuit configuration shown in FIG. 97 is used, for example, the symbol control microcomputer 100a mounted on the symbol control board 80a follows the process similar to steps S1851 to S1856 based on the variation pattern command to produce the effect contents (notice effect). Whether or not to perform, and the type of notice effect). Then, the symbol controlling microcomputer 100a causes the VDP 109 to perform a notice effect using the variable display device 9 in accordance with the determined effect contents. Further, the symbol control microcomputer 100a may generate an effect content designation command indicating the determined effect content and transmit it to the sound / lamp control board 80b. The sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b mounted on the sound / lamp control board 80b performs display control of the lamps 25, 28a, 28b, 28c in accordance with the contents of the effect indicated by the received effect content designation command. Sound output control of the sound output device 27 may be performed.

  In this embodiment, the case where the sound / lamp control board 80b and the symbol control board 80a are used as the case where each effector is controlled using separate control boards has been described. You may control each effect means using. For example, each rendering means may be controlled using a sound control board that controls the sound output device 27, a lamp control board that controls each lamp, and a symbol control board that controls the variable display device 9. In this case, for example, an effect control command from the main board 31 is first received by the sound control board, and the sound control microcomputer mounted on the sound control board receives the effect contents (the notice effect) based on the received variation pattern command. Whether or not to perform, and the type of the notice effect) may be determined. In addition, the sound control microcomputer specifies the number of decorative symbol shifts based on the display result designation command, and the decorative symbol variation time based on the basic time indicated by the variation pattern command and the decorative symbol shift number. May be specified. Then, the sound control microcomputer may generate a command including the determined content of the effect and the variation time (or add it to the effect control command) and transmit it to the lamp control board or the symbol control board. The production control command from the main board 31 is first received by the lamp control board or the design control board, and the microcomputer mounted on the lamp control board or the design control board determines the production contents or specifies the variation time. Also good.

Embodiment 3 FIG.
In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the CPU 56 executes the interrupt process at the time of a communication error with priority over other interrupt processes has been described. However, interrupt processes other than the interrupt process at the time of a communication error ( For example, priority may be given to interrupt processing at the time of reception. Hereinafter, a third embodiment in which interrupt processing at the time of reception is preferentially executed will be described.

  In the present embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 executes the main process according to the same process as in FIG. 39 and FIG. In the main process, the process from step S1 to step S15a (including the process from step S80 and the process from step S91 to step S93) is the same as those shown in the first embodiment. Further, the processes from step S16 to step S19 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  When the serial communication circuit setting process in step S15a is executed and the serial communication circuit 505 is initialized, the CPU 56 initializes the priority of the interrupt process to be executed in response to the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 (step S15b). . In this embodiment, an interrupt process that causes an interruption cause that the serial communication circuit 505 has received the received data is specified in advance in the specification information. Then, based on the designation information, the CPU 56 performs an initial setting so as to preferentially execute an interrupt process whose cause is the reception of received data. That is, in this embodiment, in the interrupt processing priority table shown in FIG. 41, by default, the interrupt processing that causes the occurrence of a communication error in the serial communication circuit 505 is preferentially executed. Although set, the CPU 56 sets the priority order of the interrupt processing so that the interrupt processing whose cause is the reception of the received data is preferentially executed based on the designation information set by the user. change. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 sets a reception-time interrupt priority execution flag indicating that priority is given to interrupt processing that causes reception of received data.

  In the loop process from step S17 to step S19 in the main process, if there is an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 during the interrupt enabled state, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 follows the process shown in FIG. The serial communication circuit 505 executes interrupt processing according to the interrupt cause for which an interrupt request has been made.

  The CPU 56 determines whether or not any interrupt process is preferentially executed. For example, the CPU 56 determines whether or not any interrupt process is preferentially executed. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 preferentially executes an interrupt process in which the reception data is received based on the fact that the reception interrupt priority execution flag is set.

  When there is an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505, the CPU 56 checks each bit of the status register A 705 of the serial communication circuit 505 to identify the cause of the interrupt. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 preferentially confirms bit 5 of the status register A705 to identify the cause of the interrupt. That is, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the serial communication circuit 505 has made an interrupt request due to the fact that the received data has been received as an interrupt cause in preference to other interrupt causes (the occurrence of a communication error or the completion of transmission of transmission data). . When determining that the bit 5 of the status register A is “1”, the CPU 56 specifies that the cause of the interruption is that the serial communication circuit 505 has received the reception data.

  If it is determined that the cause of the interruption is that the serial communication circuit 505 has received the received data, the CPU 56 preferentially executes the reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 73 (b). In this case, the CPU 56 sets a reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 505 is receiving reception data (step S42).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 initializes the priority of interrupt processing before setting the interrupt-permitted state in the main processing. For this reason, it is possible to reliably execute an interrupt process to be preferentially executed among interrupt processes corresponding to a plurality of types of interrupt causes. In addition, since the interrupt process to be executed with priority can be initialized, the degree of freedom of the program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 can be improved.

  For example, in the reception process in the prize ball process (for example, the prize ball ACK waiting process in step S1234), each bit of the status register A705 is checked to determine whether or not a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505. If a simple program is built, control can be performed so that a command is not received when a communication error occurs without executing an interrupt process that causes the occurrence of a communication error. Therefore, when a program that confirms the occurrence of a communication error in the reception process is built, priority is given to the interrupt process that causes the reception of data to cause a game control micro The degree of freedom of the program executed by the CPU 56 of the computer 560 can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the expression “the serial communication circuit 505 issues an interrupt request to the CPU 56 during reception” is used. Specifically, when an interrupt factor (data reception in this example) occurs. In addition, the interrupt control circuit 714 of the serial communication circuit 505 sets a setting value in a corresponding bit of the status register A 705 (bit 5 corresponding to data reception) and outputs an interrupt signal to the CPU 56, whereby the serial communication circuit 505 An interrupt request is received at the time of reception.

Embodiment 4 FIG.
In each of the embodiments described above, the case has been described in which the CPU 56 sets or changes which interrupt process has priority over the interrupt process corresponding to the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505. However, when a timer interrupt and an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 are generated at the same time, it may be possible to set or change which interrupt processing is to be preferentially executed. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a fourth embodiment for setting or changing which of the timer interrupt and the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 has priority.

  In the present embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  First, main processing in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing main processing in the fourth embodiment. Of the main processing, the processing from step S1 to step S6 (including step S80) is the same as the processing shown in the first embodiment (see FIG. 39). In the main process shown in FIG. 98, processes from step S7 to step S15a (including processes from step S91 to step S93) are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

  When the serial communication circuit setting process in step S15a is executed and the serial communication circuit 505 is initialized, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process executed when a timer interrupt occurs and the interrupt request of the serial communication circuit 505. The priority of interrupt processing is initially set (step S15c).

  For example, the CPU 56 initializes the priority of each interrupt process according to a predetermined interrupt process priority table including the default priority of each interrupt process. FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an interrupt processing priority table in the fourth embodiment. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 is initially configured to preferentially execute an interrupt process whose cause is a communication error in the serial communication circuit 505 in accordance with the interrupt process priority table shown in FIG. Set. That is, the CPU 56 sets by default so that an interrupt process (in this example, a communication error interrupt process) by an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 sets an interrupt priority execution flag at the time of communication error indicating that priority is given to an interrupt process whose cause is an interrupt.

  In this embodiment, in step S15c, the interrupt processing priority is initially set in accordance with the interrupt processing priority table shown in FIG. 99, so that the timer interrupt and the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 are performed. Occur at the same time, priority is given to interrupt processing for an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505.

  In addition, the default priority of each interrupt process can be changed by the user. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 stores specification information for specifying an interrupt process set by a user (for example, a game machine manufacturer) in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54 in advance. Then, the CPU 56 sets the priority of interrupt processing according to the designation information stored in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 54.

  For example, a case where a timer interrupt process is designated in designated information stored in advance will be described. In this case, based on the designation information, the CPU 56 performs timer interrupt processing for each interrupt processing for the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 (communication error interrupt processing, reception interrupt processing, and transmission completion interrupt processing). ) To be executed in preference to (). That is, in the interrupt processing priority order table shown in FIG. 99, the interrupt processing is set by default so as to preferentially execute the interrupt processing that causes the occurrence of a communication error in the serial communication circuit 505. Based on the designation information set by the user, the CPU 56 changes the priority of the interrupt process so that the timer interrupt process is executed with priority. In this case, for example, the CPU 56 sets a timer interrupt priority execution flag indicating that timer interrupt processing is executed with priority.

  Further, the processes from step S16 to step S19 are the same as those shown in the first embodiment. When the interrupt-permitted state is set in step S19, the timer interrupt or interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 is permitted until the next processing in step S17 is executed and the interrupt-prohibited state is set. . When a timer interrupt occurs while the interrupt permission state is set, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a timer interrupt process to be described later. In addition, when an interrupt request is generated from the serial communication circuit 505 while the interrupt permission state is set, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 causes each interrupt process (communication error interrupt process and reception) to be described later. Execute time interruption processing and transmission completion interruption processing). Further, in the present embodiment, by executing step S15c before the loop processing from step S17 to step S19, the timer interrupt processing and Processing for setting or changing the priority of interrupt processing in response to an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 is performed.

  In the loop process from step S17 to step S19 in the main process, if there is an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 during the interrupt enabled state, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 follows the process shown in FIG. The serial communication circuit 505 executes interrupt processing according to the interrupt cause for which an interrupt request has been made. Further, when a timer interrupt occurs in the loop process from step S17 to step S19 in the main process, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process according to the process shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, when a timer interrupt and an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 505 occur at the same time, the CPU 56 determines whether or not an interrupt process is preferentially executed. . For example, the CPU 56 determines whether or not any interrupt process is preferentially executed. For example, the CPU 56 preferentially executes timer interrupt processing based on the setting of the timer interrupt priority execution flag.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets each interrupt corresponding to the interrupt request from the timer interrupt process and the serial communication circuit 505 before setting the interrupt enabled state in the main process. Initialize processing priority. Therefore, among the interrupt processing corresponding to the timer interrupt processing and the plurality of types of interrupt causes, the interrupt processing to be executed with priority can be surely executed. Further, since the interrupt process to be executed with priority can be initially set, the degree of freedom of the program executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 can be improved.

  In the above-described embodiment, characteristic configurations of gaming machines as shown in the following (1) to (6) are also shown.

  (1) The game control microcomputer includes a plurality of random number circuits (for example, a 12-bit random number circuit 503a and a 16-bit random number circuit 503b) having different predetermined ranges of numerical data that can be updated by the numerical value updating means. In the initial setting, the setting means sets a usable random number circuit from among a plurality of random number circuits built in the game control microcomputer (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S151), and the random number circuit Random number stopping means for stopping the function of the random number circuit other than the random number circuit set to be usable by the initial setting means (for example, when the game control microcomputer 560 sets the random number circuit 503 used in step S151, it is not used. The counter 521 of the random number circuit that has been set to updates the count value C It may be configured to include a portion) of odd controlled. According to such a configuration, it is configured to set whether or not each of a plurality of random number circuits having different predetermined ranges of numerical data that can be updated can be used. By setting, the range of the value of the random number to be generated can be appropriately set, and the random number need not be updated unnecessarily.

  (2) The random number circuit initial setting means stores a numerical value in a numerical maximum value register (for example, the random number maximum value setting register 535) in which a value as a maximum value in a predetermined range in which numerical data is updated is set in the initial setting. Maximum value setting means for setting a predetermined maximum value (for example, a random number maximum value) within the range of numerical data that can be updated by the updating means (for example, a part for executing step S152 in the game control microcomputer 560), Setting value determining means for determining whether or not the predetermined maximum value set by the value setting means is equal to or less than a predetermined lower limit value (for example, “256” when the 12-bit random number circuit 503a is set) The portion for executing step S153b in the gaming control microcomputer 560) and the maximum value by the set value determination means When it is determined that the predetermined maximum value set in the register is less than or equal to the predetermined lower limit value, a predetermined value (for example, 12 bits) within the range of numerical data that can be updated by the numerical value updating means is stored in the numerical maximum value register. Maximum value resetting means for resetting “4095” when the random number circuit 503a is set (for example, a part for executing step S153c in the game control microcomputer 560) may be included. According to such a configuration, the value as the maximum value of the predetermined range in which the numerical data is updated is set in advance, so that a value larger than the range of random numbers used during the execution of the timer interrupt process Can be prevented from being generated, and the processing load on the random number circuit and the game control microcomputer can be reduced. In addition, when the set maximum value is less than or equal to the predetermined lower limit value, the predetermined maximum value is reset, so that malfunction of the game control microcomputer or radio signal is used. It is possible to prevent an excessively small value from being set as the maximum value of the random number due to an action such as generating a captured signal to the gaming machine.

  (3) The gaming machine includes clock signal generation means (for example, a clock circuit 501) that generates a clock signal having a predetermined period and outputs the clock signal to a random number circuit, and the numerical value update means is provided on the condition that the clock signal is input a predetermined number of times. The numerical data is updated (for example, when the clock signal output circuit 524 inputs the random number generating clock signal SI obtained by dividing the reference clock signal CLK by 16), the counter 521 updates the count value C). The setting means may be configured to set the number of clock signal inputs, which is a condition for the numerical value updating means to update the numerical data (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S156). According to such a configuration, the numerical value updating means is configured to preset the number of times of input of the clock signal, which is a condition for updating the numerical data, so that the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit is further improved. be able to.

  (4) The game control microcomputer uses a microcomputer identification information to calculate a predetermined initial value of the numerical data set by the random number circuit initial setting means (for example, in step S154b in the game microcomputer) When the process is executed, it includes the calculation of the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 and a predetermined value (for example, a portion for calculating the calculated value by adding the predetermined value to the ID number), and the random number circuit initial setting The means sets an initial value based on the value calculated by the calculation by the numerical value calculation means (for example, when the gaming microcomputer executes the process of step S154b, the calculated calculated value is used as the initial value of the count value. Set). According to such a configuration, since the initial value is set based on the value calculated by the calculation using the microcomputer identification information, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit is further improved. Can do. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the initial value of the random number simply by looking at the microcomputer identification information, and the security can be improved.

  (5) The gaming machine detects that a game medium has won a prize area in the game area (for example, winning a game ball to the special variable winning ball apparatus 20) and detects a winning detection signal (for example, detection of the count switch 23) A random number circuit that stores numerical data to be updated by the numerical value updating means based on the input of the winning detection signal from the winning detection means. A latch signal output means (for example, a latch signal generation circuit 533) that outputs a latch signal to be stored in the means. The latch signal output means receives a winning detection signal from the winning detection means continuously for a predetermined period. (For example, the random number value output from the random number read signal output circuit 526 when the timer circuit 534 measures a predetermined period (for example, 3 ms)) The latch signal generation circuit 533 outputs the random number read signal output from the random number read signal output circuit 526 to the inverted clock output from the inversion circuit 532. The portion may be configured to be output to the random value storage circuit 531 as a latch signal SL in synchronization with the rising edge of the signal SI2. According to such a configuration, when the random number storage means stores the random number based on the output of the latch signal, the latch signal is set on condition that the winning detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period. Since it is configured to output, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of noise from being erroneously recognized as the input of the input detection signal, outputting the latch signal, and storing the generated random number. In addition, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a random number generated by an illegal latch signal is stored due to an output of a latch signal by an action such as generating a capture signal using a radio signal to the gaming machine. .

  (6) The random number reading means continues on the condition that the winning detection signal is input from the winning detection means (for example, for game control) while the timer interrupt processing execution means is executed a predetermined number of times. When the microcomputer 560 executes the process of step S322, the random number storage means stores the number of times the timer interrupt process indicated by the interrupt counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 3 times). (For example, the CPU 56 reads the random R value stored as the random number value from the random value storage circuit 531 of the random number circuit 503), and a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 ms) It may be configured to be shorter than a period (for example, 6 ms) in which the loading process is executed. According to such a configuration, when reading a random number from the random number storage unit, the random number is read from the random number storage unit on condition that the winning detection signal is continuously input while the timer interruption process is executed a predetermined number of times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the random number from being read again after the random number is read and before the value of the random number stored in the random number storage unit is updated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a random number having the same value as the random number read from the previous random number storage unit from being read again.

  In the above embodiment, the following gaming machines are also disclosed.

(1) Provided with variable display means (for example, variable display device 9) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols) that can identify each of them, and a predetermined variable display execution condition (for example, After winning the game ball to the start winning opening 14 is established, the variable information start display based on the establishment of the variable display start conditions (for example, the final stop of the special symbol and the end of the jackpot game), A game control process for controlling the progress of a game, which is a gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a display result of variable display of identification information becomes a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) A game control board (for example, the main board 31) on which a game control microcomputer (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) is executed, and an electric power used for game effects. An electric component control microcomputer (for example, a sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b) that controls at least one of a sound output device (for example, a speaker 27) or a light emitter (for example, each lamp 25, 28a, 28b, 28c), which is a component. ) Mounted on the electrical component control board (for example, the sound / lamp control board 80b) and the variable display of the identification information on the variable display means are controlled, and a control for performing a predetermined effect display on the variable display means as a game effect is executed. A display control board (for example, the symbol control board 80a) on which the display control microcomputer (for example, the symbol control microcomputer 100a) is mounted, and the game control microcomputer has a variable display start condition established. Display result determining means for determining the display result of the identification information of the variable display means For example, a portion for executing step S3314 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 and a variation pattern command (for example, a command 8000 (H shown in FIG. 53) that can specify a variation pattern of variable display of identification information in the variable display means. ) To 8008 (H)) based on the fact that the command control means for transmitting the command to the electrical component control microcomputer (for example, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 sets an address corresponding to the command in step S392). A portion that transmits an effect control command in step S29), and a player who has a gaming state different from the specific gaming state when the display result determining means determines that the display result of the identification information is a specific display result. Specific advantage that is in an advantageous state Specific transition condition determination means for determining whether or not a specific transition condition (for example, transition condition to the probability variation state, high release condition) that is a condition for shifting to the state (for example, the probability variation state, the high base state) is satisfied. (For example, the part that executes step S3324 in the CPU 56 of the gaming control microcomputer 560) and the specific transition condition determination means determine that the specific transition condition is satisfied, and then the gaming state after the specific gaming state ends. Game state transition control means (for example, a part for executing steps S3503, S3509, and S3511 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the transition to a specific advantageous state. Fluctuation pattern command received from microcomputer Based on the production content determination means for determining the content of the game production (for example, the part for executing steps S1853 to S1855 in the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b) and the content of the game production determined by the production content determination means. Electric component control side command transmission means (for example, a part for executing step S1856 in the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b) for transmitting a possible command (for example, an effect content designation command) to the display control microcomputer, The display control microcomputer controls the game effect by performing a predetermined effect display on the variable display means based on the content of the game effect indicated by the command received from the electrical component control microcomputer (for example, the symbol control microcomputer). Computer 100 , Based on the effect content designation command transmitted in step S1856, the part that produces an effect using the variable display device 9 according to the same process as in step S775), the gaming state transition control means, by the specific transition condition determination means, As the specific transition condition, among the specific advantageous states, a high probability state (for example, a state in which the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result is improved as compared to before the specific transition condition is established (for example, High probability state transition that controls the transition of the gaming state to the high probability state as the specific advantageous state based on the determination that the high probability transition condition (for example, the transition condition to the probability variation state) is established. Control means (for example, a part for executing steps S3503 and S3511 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560) ) And a high transition state (for example, a high transition state where the variable display execution condition is more likely to be established in the specific advantageous condition than before the specific transition condition is established as the specific transition condition by the specific transition condition determination unit. Based on the determination that a high establishment condition (for example, a high release condition) to be transferred to the base state) is established, a high establishment state transition control unit (for example, a transition control of the gaming state to the high establishment state as a specific advantageous state) And a game state determination means (for example, a part for executing steps S3503 and S3509 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560) and which game state transition control means determines to which game state the transition control is performed (for example, Steps S3316, S3317, and S3320 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 are performed. And the specific transition condition determination means when the gaming state determination means determines that the gaming state is controlled to shift to both the high probability state and the high establishment state (for example, for game control) When the CPU 56 of the microcomputer 560 determines Y in step S3316 and determines Y in step S3317) and when it is determined that the gaming state is controlled to be shifted only to the high probability state (for example, game control) The CPU 56 of the microcomputer 560 shifts to both the high probability state and the high establishment state at different ratios when the CPU 56 of the microcomputer 560 determines Y in step S3316 and N in step S3317). Using another data that sets whether to transfer to any of the high establishment conditions, the high probability transfer condition or high It is determined whether none of the conditions is satisfied, or both the high probability transition condition and the high satisfaction condition are satisfied (for example, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 sets the probability variation / high base time state set in step S3318. A gaming machine configured to use the determination table or the probability variation / low base state determination table set in step S3319) to execute the state determination process in step S3324.
According to such a configuration, the game control microcomputer does not have to determine the contents of the presentation. Therefore, the processing burden of the game control microcomputer can be reduced. Further, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the current game state is an advantageous state. In addition, the player can be interested in which game state is to be changed during the game, and the player's interest in the game can be maintained.

(2) A variable display means (for example, a variable display device 9) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols) that can identify each of them is provided, and predetermined variable display execution conditions (for example, After winning the game ball to the start winning opening 14 is established, the variable information start display based on the establishment of the variable display start conditions (for example, the final stop of the special symbol and the end of the jackpot game), A game control process for controlling the progress of a game, which is a gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a display result of variable display of identification information becomes a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) A game control board (for example, the main board 31) on which a game control microcomputer (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) is executed, and an electric power used for game effects. An electric component control microcomputer (for example, a sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b) that controls at least one of a sound output device (for example, a speaker 27) or a light emitter (for example, each lamp 25, 28a, 28b, 28c), which is a component. ) Mounted on the electrical component control board (for example, the sound / lamp control board 80b) and the variable display of the identification information on the variable display means are controlled, and a control for performing a predetermined effect display on the variable display means as a game effect is executed. A display control board (for example, the symbol control board 80a) on which the display control microcomputer (for example, the symbol control microcomputer 100a) is mounted, and the game control microcomputer has a variable display start condition established. Display result determining means for determining the display result of the identification information of the variable display means For example, a portion for executing step S3314 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 and a variation pattern command (for example, a command 8000 (H shown in FIG. 53) that can specify a variation pattern of variable display of identification information in the variable display means. ) To 8008 (H)) based on the fact that the command control means for transmitting the command to the electrical component control microcomputer (for example, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 sets an address corresponding to the command in step S392). A portion that transmits an effect control command in step S29), and a player who has a gaming state different from the specific gaming state when the display result determining means determines that the display result of the identification information is a specific display result. Specific advantage that is in an advantageous state Specific transition condition determination means for determining whether or not a specific transition condition (for example, transition condition to the probability variation state, high release condition) that is a condition for shifting to the state (for example, the probability variation state, the high base state) is satisfied. (For example, the part that executes step S3324 in the CPU 56 of the gaming control microcomputer 560) and the specific transition condition determination means determine that the specific transition condition is satisfied, and then the gaming state after the specific gaming state ends. Game state transition control means (for example, a part for executing steps S3503, S3509, and S3511 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the transition to a specific advantageous state. Fluctuation pattern command received from microcomputer Based on the production content determination means for determining the content of the game production (for example, the part for executing steps S1853 to S1855 in the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b) and the content of the game production determined by the production content determination means. Electric component control side command transmission means (for example, a part for executing step S1856 in the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b) for transmitting a possible command (for example, an effect content designation command) to the display control microcomputer, The display control microcomputer controls the game effect by performing a predetermined effect display on the variable display means based on the content of the game effect indicated by the command received from the electrical component control microcomputer (for example, the symbol control microcomputer). Computer 100 , Based on the effect content designation command transmitted in step S1856, the part that produces an effect using the variable display device 9 according to the same process as in step S775), the gaming state transition control means, by the specific transition condition determination means, As the specific transition condition, among the specific advantageous states, a high probability state (for example, a state in which the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result is improved as compared to before the specific transition condition is established (for example, High probability state transition that controls the transition of the gaming state to the high probability state as the specific advantageous state based on the determination that the high probability transition condition (for example, the transition condition to the probability variation state) is established. Control means (for example, a part for executing steps S3503 and S3511 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560) ) And a high transition state (for example, a high transition state where the variable display execution condition is more likely to be established in the specific advantageous condition than before the specific transition condition is established as the specific transition condition by the specific transition condition determination unit. Based on the determination that a high establishment condition (for example, a high release condition) to be transferred to the base state) is established, a high establishment state transition control unit (for example, a transition control of the gaming state to the high establishment state as a specific advantageous state) And a game state determination means (for example, a part for executing steps S3503 and S3509 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560) and which game state transition control means determines to which game state the transition control is performed (for example, Steps S3316, S3317, and S3320 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 are performed. And the specific transition condition determination means when the gaming state determination means determines that the gaming state is controlled to shift only to the high probability state (for example, the CPU 56 of the gaming control microcomputer 560). However, when it is determined as Y in step S3316 and N is determined in step S3317), and when it is determined that the gaming state is not controlled to shift to either the high probability state or the high establishment state (for example, game control) The CPU 56 of the microcomputer 560 shifts to both the high-probability state and the high-establishment state at different ratios when N is determined in step S3316 and N is determined in step S3320). Using another data that sets whether to move only to the state, both high probability transition condition and high satisfaction condition, It is determined whether only the high probability transition condition is satisfied (for example, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 sets the probability variation / low base time state determination table set in step S3319 or the normal / low base time set in step S3322). A gaming machine configured to use a state determination table to execute the state determination process in step S3324.
According to such a configuration, the game control microcomputer does not have to determine the contents of the presentation. Therefore, the processing burden of the game control microcomputer can be reduced. Further, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the current game state is an advantageous state. In addition, the player can be interested in which game state is to be changed during the game, and the player's interest in the game can be maintained.

(3) A variable display means (for example, variable display device 9) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols) that can identify each of them is provided, and predetermined variable display execution conditions (for example, After winning the game ball to the start winning opening 14 is established, the variable information start display based on the establishment of the variable display start conditions (for example, the final stop of the special symbol and the end of the jackpot game), A game control process for controlling the progress of a game, which is a gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a display result of variable display of identification information becomes a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) A game control board (for example, the main board 31) on which a game control microcomputer (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) is executed, and an electric power used for game effects. An electric component control microcomputer (for example, a sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b) that controls at least one of a sound output device (for example, a speaker 27) or a light emitter (for example, each lamp 25, 28a, 28b, 28c), which is a component. ) Mounted on the electrical component control board (for example, the sound / lamp control board 80b) and the variable display of the identification information on the variable display means are controlled, and a control for performing a predetermined effect display on the variable display means as a game effect is executed. A display control board (for example, the symbol control board 80a) on which the display control microcomputer (for example, the symbol control microcomputer 100a) is mounted, and the game control microcomputer has a variable display start condition established. Display result determining means for determining the display result of the identification information of the variable display means For example, a portion for executing step S3314 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 and a variation pattern command (for example, a command 8000 (H shown in FIG. 53) that can specify a variation pattern of variable display of identification information in the variable display means. ) To 8008 (H)) based on the fact that the command control means for transmitting the command to the electrical component control microcomputer (for example, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 sets an address corresponding to the command in step S392). A portion that transmits an effect control command in step S29), and a player who has a gaming state different from the specific gaming state when the display result determining means determines that the display result of the identification information is a specific display result. Specific advantage that is in an advantageous state Specific transition condition determination means for determining whether or not a specific transition condition (for example, transition condition to the probability variation state, high release condition) that is a condition for shifting to the state (for example, the probability variation state, the high base state) is satisfied. (For example, the part that executes step S3324 in the CPU 56 of the gaming control microcomputer 560) and the specific transition condition determination means determine that the specific transition condition is satisfied, and then the gaming state after the specific gaming state ends. Game state transition control means (for example, a part for executing steps S3503, S3509, and S3511 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the transition to a specific advantageous state. Fluctuation pattern command received from microcomputer Based on the production content determination means for determining the content of the game production (for example, the part for executing steps S1853 to S1855 in the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b) and the content of the game production determined by the production content determination means. Electric component control side command transmission means (for example, a part for executing step S1856 in the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b) for transmitting a possible command (for example, an effect content designation command) to the display control microcomputer, The display control microcomputer controls the game effect by performing a predetermined effect display on the variable display means based on the content of the game effect indicated by the command received from the electrical component control microcomputer (for example, the symbol control microcomputer). Computer 100 , Based on the effect content designation command transmitted in step S1856, the part that produces an effect using the variable display device 9 according to the same process as in step S775), the gaming state transition control means, by the specific transition condition determination means, As the specific transition condition, among the specific advantageous states, a high probability state (for example, a state in which the probability that the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result is improved as compared to before the specific transition condition is established (for example, High probability state transition that controls the transition of the gaming state to the high probability state as the specific advantageous state based on the determination that the high probability transition condition (for example, the transition condition to the probability variation state) is established. Control means (for example, a part for executing steps S3503 and S3511 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560) ) And a high transition state (for example, a high transition state where the variable display execution condition is more likely to be established in the specific advantageous condition than before the specific transition condition is established as the specific transition condition by the specific transition condition determination unit. Based on the determination that a high establishment condition (for example, a high release condition) to be transferred to the base state) is established, a high establishment state transition control unit (for example, a transition control of the gaming state to the high establishment state as a specific advantageous state) And a game state determination means (for example, a part for executing steps S3503 and S3509 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560) and which game state transition control means determines to which game state the transition control is performed (for example, Steps S3316, S3317, and S3320 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 are performed. And the specific transition condition determination means when the gaming state determination means determines that the gaming state is controlled to shift only to the high probability state (for example, the CPU 56 of the gaming control microcomputer 560). However, when it is determined as Y in step S3316 and N is determined in step S3317), and when it is determined that the gaming state is not controlled to shift to either the high probability state or the high establishment state (for example, game control) The CPU 56 of the microcomputer 560 shifts to both the high-probability state and the high-establishment state at different ratios when N is determined in step S3316 and N is determined in step S3320). High probability transition conditions using different data set to whether to transition to either the state or the high establishment state It is determined whether none of the high establishment conditions is established, or both the high probability transition condition and the high establishment condition are established (for example, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 sets the probability change / value set in step S3319). A gaming machine configured to perform a state determination process in step S3324 using the low base state determination table or the normal / low base state determination table set in step S3322.
According to such a configuration, the game control microcomputer does not have to determine the contents of the presentation. Therefore, the processing burden of the game control microcomputer can be reduced. Further, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the current game state is an advantageous state. In addition, the player can be interested in which game state is to be changed during the game, and the player's interest in the game can be maintained.

(4) When the display result determination means determines that the display result of the identification information is the specific display result, the specific transition condition determination means is shifted to both the high probability state and the high establishment state by the gaming state determination means. (For example, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 determines Y in step S3316 and determines Y in step S3317), or a high probability state or a high establishment state. It is set to shift to both the high probability state and the highly established state at a higher rate than when transitioning to either of the above, and at a higher rate than when not transitioning to either the high probability state or the highly established state Is used to determine whether the specific transition condition is satisfied (for example, the CPU 5 of the game control microcomputer 560). However, using the probability change / high base state determination table set in step S3318, the state determination process in step S3324 determines that the transition to the probability change / high base state is again made at a rate of 50% (see FIG. 57). A gaming machine that is configured as follows.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to continue (loop) at a high rate a state in which both the high probability state and the high establishment state, which are the most advantageous state for the player, are made. Therefore, a player's interest can be heightened more about changing to the high probability state and the high establishment state from the state other than the state changing to both the high probability state and the high establishment state.

(5) The game control microcomputer transmits a game state command transmission means (for example, for game control) that transmits a game state command (for example, a specific jackpot end display command) that can specify the game state determined by the game state determination means. The CPU 56 of the microcomputer 560 includes a portion that executes steps S3506 and 3512), and either the electric component control microcomputer or the display control microcomputer has a plurality of presentation data (for example, display control execution data and lamp control execution) in advance. Effect data storage means (for example, ROM in the sound / lamp control board 80b) for storing the data) and the effect data corresponding to the game state based on the game state command transmitted by the game state command transmission means. From storage means Effect data selection means (for example, a portion for selecting display control execution data and lamp control execution data in the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b from the ROM) and a predetermined change condition (for example, an effect change determination random number (random) 1) is equal to a predetermined value), the effect data selection means at the time of change is selected from the effect data storage means for effect data different from the effect data corresponding to the gaming state specified by the gaming state command. (For example, in the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b, a portion for selecting display control execution data corresponding to the effect mode changed in accordance with the process similar to step S1868 from the ROM), effect data selection means or change effect data selection Based on the production data selected by the means Production execution means for executing control for performing display (for example, a portion for performing game production in the variable display device 9 using the changed display control execution data in the design control microcomputer 100a). Gaming machines.
According to such a configuration, even if the same gaming state continues, it is possible to change the effect and perform the game effect. Therefore, even if the same gaming state continues, it is as if the gaming state has been shifted by selecting the presentation data different from the presentation data corresponding to the gaming state specified by the gaming state command An impression can be given to the player, and the player's interest in the game can be enhanced.

(6) The game control microcomputer has a built-in random number circuit (for example, a random number circuit 503) for generating a random number, and the random number circuit is based on the input of a predetermined signal (for example, a clock signal) to obtain numerical data (for example, , Count value) within a predetermined range in which the count value can be updated, numerical value updating means (for example, counter 521) for updating numerical data in accordance with a predetermined order from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value, and updating by the numerical value updating means Random number storage means (for example, a random value storage circuit 531) for storing the numerical value data as a random value, and the gaming control microcomputer starts the initial operation of the random number circuit when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Random circuit initial setting means for setting (for example, a part for executing step S15 in the game control microcomputer 560); After the random number circuit initial setting means performs initial setting of the random number circuit, timer interrupt setting means (for example, step S16 in the game control microcomputer 560) is set to generate a timer interrupt every predetermined time. A portion to be executed) and timer interrupt processing execution means for executing a timer interrupt processing when a timer interrupt occurs (for example, a portion for executing steps S20 to S35 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560). In the timer interrupt process executed by the timer interrupt process executing means, an execution condition determining means for determining whether or not a variable display execution condition (for example, winning a game ball to the start winning opening 14) is satisfied ( For example, the part which performs step S311 and S312 in CPU56 of the game control microcomputer), When the row condition determining means determines that the variable display execution condition is satisfied, the random number reading means for reading the random value stored in the random number storing means (for example, step S3204 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 is executed). The display result determination means determines whether or not the random number value read by the random number reading means matches a predetermined determination value when the variable display start condition is satisfied, It is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the identification information is to be a specific display result (for example, the step of executing step S3314 in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560). A predetermined initial value of the numerical data updated by the numerical value updating means for each game control microcomputer Is set based on microcomputer identification information (for example, an ID number unique to the game control microcomputer 560) for identifying the game control microcomputer assigned to (for example, executing step S154 in the game control microcomputer 560) A gaming machine that is configured as:
According to such a configuration, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit can be improved. In addition, since randomness of random numbers can be improved, the timing of random number generation can be made difficult to be recognized by a player or a game store, and a capture signal using a radio signal can be generated for a gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the condition for shifting to the specific gaming state from being illegally established.

(7) The random number circuit initial setting means determines whether or not to change the predetermined initial value set by the random number circuit initial setting means when the numerical data is updated to a predetermined final value by the numerical value updating means in the initial setting. Including an initial value change setting means (for example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S157), and the random number circuit is configured so that the numerical data is updated when the numerical data is updated to a predetermined final value by the numerical value updating means. A notification signal output means (for example, a counter 521) that outputs a notification signal indicating that the data has been updated to a predetermined final value, and an initial value is set by the initial value change setting means based on the output of the notification signal. Initial value changing means for changing the value of a predetermined initial value when the setting to be changed is made (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560). Kicking portions for performing the steps S220～S226) and game machine is configured to include.
According to such a configuration, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit can be further improved.

(8) In the initial setting, the random number circuit initial setting means sets the order of values from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value of the numerical data updated by the numerical value updating means (for example, the count value C updated by the counter 521). Including a numerical order setting means (for example, a part for executing step S158 in the game control microcomputer 560) for setting whether or not to change the permutation), and the random number circuit has numerical data up to a predetermined final value by the numerical value updating means. Is updated based on the notification signal output means (for example, the counter 521) that outputs a notification signal indicating that the numerical data has been updated to a predetermined final value, and the notification signal is output. When the circuit initial setting means is set to change the arrangement order of the numerical data from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value, Includes numerical value changing means for changing the order of numerical data to be updated from a predetermined initial value to a predetermined final value (for example, a part for executing step S26 in the game control microcomputer 560). Gaming machines.
According to such a configuration, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit can be further improved.

(9) The game control microcomputer incorporates a serial communication circuit (eg, serial communication circuit 505) for serial communication with a microcomputer other than the game control microcomputer (eg, payout control microcomputer 370). The communication circuit satisfies any of a plurality of interrupt request conditions (for example, a communication error has occurred in the serial communication circuit 505, transmission of transmission data has been completed, or reception data has been received from the control board). An interrupt request means (for example, an interrupt control circuit 714) for generating an interrupt request according to the established interrupt request condition in order to cause the game control microcomputer to execute a predetermined interrupt process. The game control microcomputer interrupts based on the interrupt request from the interrupt request means. Including interrupt processing execution means (for example, a part for executing steps S41, S42, and S43 by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560). The interrupt request generated by the interrupt request means is a serial communication circuit. Including an error time interrupt request (for example, a communication error time interrupt request) that occurs when an interrupt request condition is satisfied when a communication error occurs in When an interrupt request is generated at the same time, the interrupt processing based on the error time interrupt request is changed to an interrupt request other than an error time interrupt request (for example, a reception time interrupt request or a transmission time interrupt request). Priority processing means to be executed in preference to the original interrupt processing (for example, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S15b to execute priority interrupt on error. Communication prohibition that prohibits serial communication in interrupt processing based on an interrupt request at the time of error, including the part that executes the communication error interrupt processing of FIG. 64 (a) with priority based on setting the lag) When the means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the communication error flag is set in steps S1241, S1251, S1261, S1271, and S1291 based on the communication error flag set in step S41, A gaming machine configured to include a portion for ending processing as it is.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent communication with the control board mounted on the gaming machine in a state where a communication error has occurred. Therefore, malfunction due to a communication error can be prevented.

(10) The gaming control microcomputer performs serial communication circuit initial setting means for initializing the serial communication circuit when power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, step in the CPU 56 of the gaming control microcomputer 560) A portion for executing S15a) and timer interrupt setting means for setting to generate a timer interrupt every predetermined time (for example, a portion for executing step S16 in the game control microcomputer 560). The interrupt request generated by the interrupt request means is a reception interrupt request (for example, when the serial communication circuit receives data from a microcomputer other than the game control microcomputer (for example, the payout control microcomputer 370)) Serial communication circuit for the first time The setting means is a priority order changing means (for example, a game) for performing the setting for changing the priority order of the interrupt processing executed by the priority processing means before the timer interrupt is set by the timer interrupt setting means. The priority processing means receives the priority of the interrupt processing by the priority changing means more than the interrupt processing based on the error time interrupt request by the priority changing means. When the interrupt processing based on the time interrupt request is changed to be executed with priority, the interrupt processing based on the reception time interrupt request is executed in preference to the interrupt processing based on the error time interrupt request. (For example, based on the fact that the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes step S15b and sets the reception interrupt priority execution flag). , When receiving is executed with priority interrupt processing) game machine that is configured as shown in FIG. 73 (b).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reliably execute an interrupt process to be preferentially executed among interrupt processes corresponding to a plurality of types of interrupt request conditions. In addition, since the interrupt process to be executed with priority can be initialized, the degree of freedom of the program executed by the game control microcomputer can be improved.

(11) The game control side command transmission means receives display result commands (for example, display result designation commands 91XX (H) to 93XX (H) shown in FIG. 53) that can specify the display result determined by the display result determination means. Display result command transmission means for transmitting (for example, a portion in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 that transmits an effect control command in step S29 based on the setting of an address corresponding to the command in step S393); The electric component control microcomputer generates command content means (for example, effect content designation command) that can specify the content of the game effect determined by the effect content determination means based on the variation pattern command and the display result command. (For example, a microphone for sound / lamp control The computer 100b includes a portion that executes step S1856 to generate an effect content designation command, and the electrical component control side command transmission means transmits the effect content command generated by the command generation means (for example, for sound / lamp control) The part in which the microcomputer 100b transmits the produced effect content designation command in step S1856), and the display control microcomputer is variable based on the content of the game effect indicated in the effect content command received from the electrical component control microcomputer. The game effect is controlled by performing a predetermined effect display on the display means (for example, the symbol control microcomputer 100a variably displays according to the process similar to step S775 based on the effect content designation command transmitted in step S1856. Use device 9 It carries out an effect Te partial) game machine that is configured to.
According to such a configuration, it is not necessary for the game control microcomputer to execute a process of generating and transmitting an effect content designation command. Therefore, the processing burden of the game control microcomputer can be reduced.

(12) The game control side command transmitting means sends display result commands (for example, display result specifying commands 91XX (H) to 93XX (H) shown in FIG. 53) that can specify the display result determined by the display result determining means. Display result command transmission means for transmitting (for example, a portion in the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 that transmits an effect control command in step S29 based on the setting of an address corresponding to the command in step S393); The electric component control microcomputer adds the contents of the game effect determined by the effect content determination means to at least one of the variation pattern command or the display result command (for example, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b). Executes step S1856 The electronic component control side command transmission means transmits the variation pattern command or display result command to which the content of the game effect is added by the effect content adding means. (For example, the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b transmits the variation pattern command to which the production contents are added and the display result designation command in step S1856), and the display control microcomputer receives from the electrical component control microcomputer. The game effect is controlled by performing a predetermined effect display on the variable display means based on the contents of the game effect indicated by the change pattern command or the display result command (for example, the symbol control microcomputer 100a receives the received change Pattern command And display result on the basis of the effect contents) that appended to the specified command, variable display device part carries out an effect by using a 9) game machine that is configured according to the same process as in step S775.
According to such a configuration, it is not necessary for the game control microcomputer to execute a process of generating and transmitting an effect content designation command. Therefore, the processing burden of the game control microcomputer can be reduced.

  The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, and in particular, gaming machines that perform variable display of decorative symbols and game effects on variable display devices based on variation pattern commands and display result designation commands. It can be suitably applied to.

1 Pachinko machine 9 Variable display device 14 Start winning opening 15 Variable winning ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
37 Dispensing control board 56 CPU
80 effect control board 80a design control board 80b sound / lamp control board 100 effect control microcomputer 100a design control microcomputer 100b sound / lamp control microcomputer 101 effect control CPU
101a Design control CPU
101b Sound / lamp control CPU
503a 12-bit random number circuit 503b 16-bit random number circuit 505 Serial communication circuit 560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (1)

Provided with variable display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, and after the predetermined variable display execution condition is established, the identification information can be changed based on the establishment of the variable display start condition A gaming machine that starts display and shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of identification information becomes a specific display result,
A game control board equipped with a game control microcomputer for executing a game control process for controlling the progress of the game;
An electrical component control board on which an electrical component control microcomputer for controlling at least one of a sound output device or a light emitter, which is an electrical component used for a game effect, is mounted;
A display control board equipped with a display control microcomputer for controlling the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means and executing a control for performing a predetermined effect display on the variable display means as a game effect,
The game control microcomputer is:
Display result determining means for determining a display result of identification information of the variable display means when a variable display start condition is satisfied;
A game control side command transmission means for transmitting a variation pattern command capable of specifying a variation pattern of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means to the electric component control microcomputer;
When the display result determining means determines that the display result of the identification information is a specific display result, the game state is shifted to a specific advantageous state that is advantageous to a player different from the specific gaming state. Specific transition condition determination means for determining whether or not a specific transition condition that is a condition of
Game state transition control means for controlling the transition of the gaming state to the specific advantageous state after the specific gaming state is ended based on the determination that the specific transition condition is satisfied by the specific transition condition determining unit;
The electric component control microcomputer is:
Production content determination means for determining the content of the game production based on the variation pattern command received from the game control microcomputer;
A command transmitting means that transmits a command that can specify the content of the game effect determined by the effect content determining means to the display control microcomputer;
The display control microcomputer controls the game effect by performing a predetermined effect display on the variable display means based on the content of the game effect indicated in the command received from the electric component control microcomputer,
The gaming state transition control means includes
By the specific transition condition determination means, the probability of setting the display result of the variable display of the identification information as the specific display result as the specific transition condition as compared with the specific advantageous state before the specific transition condition is satisfied. High probability state transition control means for performing transition control of the gaming state to the high probability state as the specific advantageous state based on determination that a high probability transition condition for transitioning to a high probability state that is an improved state is established When,
The specific transition condition determination means causes the transition to a high establishment state in which the execution condition of the variable display is more easily established than the specific advantageous condition before the establishment of the specific transition condition as the specific transition condition. A high establishment state transition control means for controlling the transition of the gaming state to the high establishment state as the specific advantageous state based on the determination that the high establishment condition is established;
The game state transition control means further comprises a game state determination means for determining which game state is controlled to be transferred,
The specific transition condition determination means includes
When it is determined by the gaming state determination means that the gaming state is controlled to be shifted to both the high probability state and the highly established state, it is determined that the gaming state is controlled to be shifted only to the high probability state The high-probability transition is performed using different data in which it is determined whether to shift to both the high-probability state and the high-establishment state or only the high-establishment state at different rates. It is determined whether both of the condition and the high satisfaction condition or only the high probability transition condition is satisfied.

Images